740
Honeywell Process Solutions SoftMaster User's Guide ML200-SoftMaster R200 11/09 Release 200 Honeywell

UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Embed Size (px)

DESCRIPTION

plc soft ware

Citation preview

Page 1: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Honeywell Process Solutions

SoftMaster User's Guide

ML200-SoftMaster

R200

11/09

Release 200

Honeywell

Page 2: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

ii SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Notices and Trademarks

Copyright 2009 by Honeywell International Inc. Release 200 November, 2009

While this information is current in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customers.

In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential damages. The information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice.

Honeywell, PlantScape, Experion PKS, and TotalPlant are registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc.

Other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Honeywell International

Process Solutions

2500 West Union Hills

Phoenix, AZ 85027

1-800 343-0228

Page 3: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide iii 11/09 Honeywell

About This Document

The document describes the operations involved in using SoftMaster to program and debug the MasterLogic 200 PLC series.

Release Information

Document Name Document ID

Release Number

Publication Date

SoftMaster User's Guide - ML200 ML200-SoftMaster

200 11/09

References The following list identifies all documents that may be sources of reference for material discussed in this publication.

Document Title

2MLI CPUU User’s Guide

Contacts

World Wide Web

The following Honeywell web sites may be of interest to Process Solution customers.

Honeywell Organization WWW Address (URL)

Corporate http://www.honeywell.com

Process Solutions http://www.honeywell.com/ps

Page 4: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Contacts

iv SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Telephone

Contact us by telephone at the numbers listed as follows.

Location Organization Phone

United States and Canada

Honeywell IAC Solution Support Center

1-800-822-7673

Europe Honeywell TAC-EMEA +32-2-728-2704

Pacific Honeywell Global TAC - Pacific

1300-300-4822 (toll free within Australia) +61-8-9362-9559 (outside Australia)

India Honeywell Global TAC - India

+91-20-2682-2458

Korea Honeywell Global TAC - Korea

+82-2-799-6317

People’s Republic of China

Honeywell Global TAC - China

+86-10-8458-3280 ext. 361

Singapore Honeywell Global TAC - South East Asia

+65-6580-3500

Taiwan Honeywell Global TAC - Taiwan

+886-7-323-5900

Japan Honeywell Global TAC - Japan

+81-3-5440-1303

Elsewhere Call your nearest Honeywell office

Page 5: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Acronyms & definitions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide v 11/09 Honeywell

Acronyms & definitions

Acronym/Term Definition

A/D Analog to Digital Conversion

Base

Base is the back plane of the PLC on which the power supply, communication and other modules gets installed Examples: Main base, expansion base.

BCD Binary Coded Decimal

Cold Restart

This is one of the CPU restart modes which affects the variable parameters of the I/O image area when the CPU is restarted. With the CPU restart mode set to cold restart, all the parameters (like the internal register, timer and counter) initialize to zero.

CPU Central Processing Unit

D/A Digital to Analog Conversion

Direct variable

Memory area which can be directly accessed with IEC standard addressing notations with or without any variable name.They are %I (input), %Q (output), and %M (internal flags & registers) variables.

Address Examples: %IX0.0.2, %QW1.2.1, and %MD1234

Dnet DeviceNet Network.

FEnet Fast Ethernet Network.

FO Fiber-Optic

Function Is an operation unit that immediately outputs the operation results for an input such as four arithmetical operations and comparative operations.

Function Block

Is an operation unit, that memorizes the operation results within the commands such as timer and counter or results derived from several scans. Function blocks are the fundamental element for logic programs. function blocks like timer and counter have input and output connections to indicate the flow.

HSL High Speed Link Service in MasterLogic-200 communication modules

Page 6: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Acronyms & definitions

vi SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Acronym/Term Definition

I/O Input / Output

I/O image area Internal memory area of CPU module installed to maintain I/O states.

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

Interrupt Task

Interrupt driven task programs executed on meeting a given condition in addition to regular scan programs. It consists of 2 types –

Timer interrupt task

Internal flag Interrupt task

KB Kilo Bytes

KStep Kilo Steps

LSB Least Significant Bit

MB Mega Bytes

ML-200 MasterLogic-200

Module

A standard component with a specific function to configure a system, such as the I/O board assembled to be inserted into the base motherboard.

Examples: CPU module, power module, and I/O module.

MSB Most Significant Bit

O/S Operating System

P2P Point to Point Service in MasterLogic-200 communication modules

PAC Process Automation Controller

PLC Programmable Logic Controller

PLC System

A system consisting of a PLC, CPU, modules and peripherals configured to be controlled by a user program.

Pnet Profibus-DP Network.

RAM Random Access Memory

Page 7: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Acronyms & definitions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide vii 11/09 Honeywell

Acronym/Term Definition

RTC As an abbreviation of Real Time Clock, it is collectively referred as a universal IC, with the function of a clock.

RTC Real Time Clock

Snet Serial Link Network.

SoftMaster Programming tool for creating, editing, and debugging a program.

STP Shielded Twisted Pair

Symbolic variable

Named Variables which are declared with a name, type but address is automatically allocated in symbolic memory area (%A) by the CPU. For instance, named variables declared as ‘Valve1’, ‘Pump2’ or ‘Speed3’ with any IEC standard data type.

TP Twisted Pair cables (typically CAT5 cables with RJ45 connectors for Ethernet communication)

UTP Unshield Twisted Pair

Warm Restart

This is one of the CPU restart modes which affects the variable parameters of the I/O image area when the CPU is restarted. With the CPU restart mode is set to warm restart, all the parameters (like the internal register, timer and counter) retain the previous values.

Watchdog Timer

A timer to monitor pre-determined execution time of a program and to generate a warning, when it is not complete within the time.

Page 8: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Acronyms & definitions

viii SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Page 9: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Symbol Definitions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide ix 11/09 Honeywell

Symbol Definitions The following table lists those symbols used in this document to denote certain conditions.

Symbol Definition

ATTENTION: Identifies information that requires special consideration.

TIP: Identifies advice or hints for the user, often in terms of performing a task.

REFERENCE -EXTERNAL: Identifies an additional source of information outside of the bookset.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL: Identifies an additional source of information within the bookset.

CAUTION

Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, may result in equipment or work (data) on the system being damaged or lost, or may result in the inability to properly operate the process.

CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.

CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the product manual for additional information. The symbol appears next to required information in the manual.

WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in serious injury or death.

WARNING symbol on the equipment refers the user to the product manual for additional information. The symbol appears next to required information in the manual.

WARNING, Risk of electrical shock: Potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4 Vpeak, or 60 VDC may be accessible.

Page 10: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Symbol Definitions

x SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Symbol Definition

ESD HAZARD: Danger of an electro-static discharge to which equipment may be sensitive. Observe precautions for handling electrostatic sensitive devices.

Protective Earth (PE) terminal: Provided for connection of the protective earth (green or green/yellow) supply system conductor.

Functional earth terminal: Used for non-safety purposes such as noise immunity improvement. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with national local electrical code requirements.

Earth Ground: Functional earth connection. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements.

Chassis Ground: Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of the equipment shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements.

Page 11: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xi 11/09 Honeywell

Contents

1. INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................25

1.1 Features of SoftMaster ................................................................................. 25

1.2 System Requirements .................................................................................. 27

2. INSTALLATION ...........................................................................29

2.1 SoftMaster Installation.................................................................................. 29 Installing SoftMaster.............................................................................................................29

2.2 USB Device Driver Installation..................................................................... 34 Installing the USB Device driver...........................................................................................34 Verifying the USB device driver installation..........................................................................41

3. BASIC APPLICATION .................................................................53

3.1 SoftMaster user interface ............................................................................. 53 Understanding the SoftMaster user interface .......................................................................53 Menu bar ..............................................................................................................................54 Tool Bar................................................................................................................................68 Status Display Line ..............................................................................................................70 Change View Window ..........................................................................................................71 Application of dialog box ......................................................................................................75

3.2 Open/Close Project ....................................................................................... 77 Open Project ........................................................................................................................77 Close Project........................................................................................................................77 Save Project.........................................................................................................................78

3.3 Edit Functions ............................................................................................... 79 Cut-Paste .............................................................................................................................79 Copy – Paste........................................................................................................................80 Drag and Drop......................................................................................................................80

3.4 Shortcut Keys ................................................................................................ 81 Configuring shortcut keys.....................................................................................................81

3.5 Edit Window Zoom In, Zoom Out................................................................. 83 Zooming in/Zooming out ......................................................................................................83

3.6 Customizing SoftMaster ............................................................................... 84 Configuring SoftMaster options ............................................................................................85

Page 12: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Contents Symbol Definitions

xii SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Configuring LD option.......................................................................................................... 92 Configuring SFC option ....................................................................................................... 94 Configuring ST option.......................................................................................................... 96

4. PROJECT CONFIGURATION..................................................... 99

4.1 Overview of Project Configuration ..............................................................99 Project configuration window............................................................................................... 99

4.2 Project Management....................................................................................101 Creating a new project ...................................................................................................... 101 Opening the Project........................................................................................................... 102 Opening a project from PLC.............................................................................................. 103 Saving a Project ................................................................................................................ 104 Saving Project as .............................................................................................................. 104

4.3 Project Item ..................................................................................................106 Add item ............................................................................................................................ 106 Adding a Program ............................................................................................................. 112 Exporting to file.................................................................................................................. 114 Importing from file.............................................................................................................. 116 Changing program execution sequence............................................................................ 123 Comparing Projects........................................................................................................... 125

4.4 Project Password.........................................................................................127 Setting Project password................................................................................................... 127 Deleting Password ............................................................................................................ 131

5. VARIABLES .............................................................................. 133

5.1 Overview of variables..................................................................................133

5.2 Global/Direct Variable .................................................................................133 Global Variable.................................................................................................................. 133 Comment of a Direct Variable ........................................................................................... 134 Flag ................................................................................................................................... 135

5.3 Global/Direct Variable Edit .........................................................................137 Global/Direct Variable Registration ................................................................................... 137 Copy, Cut, Delete and Paste............................................................................................. 139 Changing variable name ................................................................................................... 144 Insert line........................................................................................................................... 146 Delete line ......................................................................................................................... 147 Automatic fill ...................................................................................................................... 148 Drag & Drop ...................................................................................................................... 151 Undo/Redo ........................................................................................................................ 153 Export to file ...................................................................................................................... 154

Page 13: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Contents Symbol Definitions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xiii 11/09 Honeywell

Registering Special Module Variables................................................................................154 Preview ..............................................................................................................................156 Print....................................................................................................................................157 Other functions...................................................................................................................157

5.4 Local Variable .............................................................................................. 160 Local Variable ....................................................................................................................160

5.5 Local Variable Edit ...................................................................................... 161 Local Variable Registration ................................................................................................161 Copy, Cut, Delete and Paste..............................................................................................163 Add EXTERNAL Variable...................................................................................................163

5.6 Function Block Variable ............................................................................. 165 FB Variable ........................................................................................................................165

5.7 FB Variable Edit........................................................................................... 166 FB Variable Registration ....................................................................................................166 Copy, Cut, Delete and Paste..............................................................................................168 Add EXTERNAL Variable...................................................................................................168

5.8 FUNCTION Variable..................................................................................... 170 FUN Variable......................................................................................................................170

5.9 FUN Variable Edit ........................................................................................ 171 FUN Variable Registration..................................................................................................171 Copy, Cut, Delete and Paste..............................................................................................172 Export to file .......................................................................................................................173

5.10 Editing Variables ..................................................................................... 174 Variable Registration..........................................................................................................174 Copy, Cut, Delete and Paste Insert Line, Delete Line, Automatic fill, Drag and Drop, Undo/Redo.........................................................................................................................175 Export to file .......................................................................................................................175

5.11 User-defined Function/Function Block ................................................. 176 Creating User-defined Function/Function Block Program ..................................................177 Creating User-defined Function/Function Block I/O Variable .............................................179 User-defined Function/Function Block Programming .........................................................180 Using User-defined Function/Function Blocks....................................................................183

6. LD EDIT......................................................................................187

6.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 187

6.2 Limits............................................................................................................ 187

6.3 Program Edit................................................................................................ 188 Edit Tools ...........................................................................................................................188 Input Contact point .............................................................................................................190

Page 14: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Contents Symbol Definitions

xiv SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Input OR contact point....................................................................................................... 191 Entering Variable/Address................................................................................................. 193 Inserting lines .................................................................................................................... 196 Inserting Coil ..................................................................................................................... 197 Inserting a function block................................................................................................... 198 Favorite Function Block..................................................................................................... 200 Entering comments ........................................................................................................... 205 Input Label ........................................................................................................................ 208 Insert Extension Function.................................................................................................. 210 Insert Cell .......................................................................................................................... 211 Insert Line ......................................................................................................................... 212 Delete Item........................................................................................................................ 213 Delete Cell......................................................................................................................... 214 Delete Line ........................................................................................................................ 215 Copy/Cut/Paste ................................................................................................................. 215 Undo and Redo ................................................................................................................. 217 Program Edit Mode ........................................................................................................... 218

6.4 Viewing Program Options...........................................................................221 View IL Program................................................................................................................ 221 Program Magnification Change......................................................................................... 222 View Address .................................................................................................................... 222 View Variables................................................................................................................... 223 View Address/Variables .................................................................................................... 223 View Address/Comment.................................................................................................... 224 View Variables/Comments ................................................................................................ 224 Adjust No. of Contact Point ............................................................................................... 225 LD View Properties............................................................................................................ 226

6.5 Additional Edit Function .............................................................................228 Optimize Program ............................................................................................................. 228 Block Mask Instruction ...................................................................................................... 229 Bookmark .......................................................................................................................... 231 Go To ................................................................................................................................ 236

7. SFC EDIT................................................................................... 243

7.1 Overview.......................................................................................................243

7.2 SFC program limitations.............................................................................243

7.3 Program Edit ................................................................................................244 Edit Tools .......................................................................................................................... 244 Input step/transition ........................................................................................................... 245 Input Action ....................................................................................................................... 247 Input Block/Transition........................................................................................................ 248 Input label.......................................................................................................................... 249 Input Jump ........................................................................................................................ 250

Page 15: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Contents Symbol Definitions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xv 11/09 Honeywell

Create left branch...............................................................................................................251 Create right branch ............................................................................................................254 Edit Step Property ..............................................................................................................258 Transition property .............................................................................................................259 Action property ...................................................................................................................260 Edit Block Property.............................................................................................................264 Edit label property ..............................................................................................................266 Jump property ....................................................................................................................267 Set Branch Priority .............................................................................................................268 Erase Branch Priority .........................................................................................................270 Delete item.........................................................................................................................270 Copy/Cut/Paste ..................................................................................................................271 Cut/Paste ...........................................................................................................................273 Undo and Redo ..................................................................................................................274 Program Edit Mode ............................................................................................................276

7.4 View Program .............................................................................................. 277 Program zoom In/Out.........................................................................................................277 SFC Property .....................................................................................................................277 View Block/Action/Transition List .......................................................................................284 Open Action/Transition.......................................................................................................285 Address/Variables ..............................................................................................................285 Address/Comments............................................................................................................286 Adjust Contact No. .............................................................................................................286

7.5 Edit additional Function ............................................................................. 288 Bookmark setting ...............................................................................................................288 Go To .................................................................................................................................291

8. PROGRAMMING........................................................................299

8.1 Cross Reference.......................................................................................... 299 View All Addresses ............................................................................................................299 Data Sorting .......................................................................................................................300 Output Cross Reference Instantly ......................................................................................302 Check Duplicate Coil Instantly............................................................................................303

8.2 Used Address .............................................................................................. 306 Viewing Used Address .......................................................................................................306 View Address Uses ............................................................................................................308

8.3 Check Program............................................................................................ 310 Check Program Setting ......................................................................................................310 Check Result Trace............................................................................................................314 Logic Error..........................................................................................................................315 Grammar Error ...................................................................................................................320

Page 16: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Contents Symbol Definitions

xvi SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

9. FIND/REPLACE......................................................................... 333

9.1 Find Address................................................................................................333 Find Next Address............................................................................................................. 335 Find All Address ................................................................................................................ 338

9.2 Find Text.......................................................................................................340 Finding text........................................................................................................................ 340 Find All String .................................................................................................................... 345

9.3 Address Replacement .................................................................................347 Replace Address ............................................................................................................... 347 Replace All Addresses ...................................................................................................... 350

9.4 Text Replacement ........................................................................................354 Replace text string............................................................................................................. 354 Replace All String.............................................................................................................. 357

9.5 Find Again ....................................................................................................360

10. PARAMETERS .......................................................................... 361

10.1 Basic Parameter .......................................................................................361 Basic Parameter Setting.................................................................................................... 361

10.2 I/O Parameters..........................................................................................369 Setting I/O parameters ...................................................................................................... 369 Base Module Setup ........................................................................................................... 371 Module Information Setting Based on Slots ...................................................................... 372 I/O Parameter Edit Function.............................................................................................. 374 Detailed Module Information Setting ................................................................................. 377 I/O Parameter Print Function............................................................................................. 386

11. ONLINE...................................................................................... 389

11.1 Connection Options for the PLC ............................................................389 Local Connection Setting .................................................................................................. 389 Using the Local RS-232C.................................................................................................. 390 Using the Local USB ......................................................................................................... 392 Remote 1 Connect Setting ................................................................................................ 392 Remote 2 Connect Setting ................................................................................................ 396

11.2 Online Functions......................................................................................397 Connect............................................................................................................................. 397 Write.................................................................................................................................. 401 Read.................................................................................................................................. 402 Change Mode.................................................................................................................... 403 Compare with PLC ............................................................................................................ 404

Page 17: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Contents Symbol Definitions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xvii 11/09 Honeywell

Reset PLC..........................................................................................................................405 Clearing PLC data..............................................................................................................407 PLC Information .................................................................................................................409 Password ...........................................................................................................................411 PLC History ........................................................................................................................416 PLC Error/Warning.............................................................................................................421 Flash Memory Setting ........................................................................................................422 Force I/O Setting ................................................................................................................425 Force I/O Setting ................................................................................................................427 Forced I/O Cancel ..............................................................................................................431 Skip I/O setting...................................................................................................................433 Fault Mask..........................................................................................................................442

11.3 Module Changing Wizard........................................................................ 445

12. MONITORING ............................................................................451

12.1 Monitoring ................................................................................................ 451 Start/Stop Monitoring .........................................................................................................451 Change Current Value .......................................................................................................451 Pause/Restart Monitoring...................................................................................................454 Pausing Conditions ............................................................................................................454

12.2 LD Program Monitoring .......................................................................... 457 Start/Stop monitoring .........................................................................................................459

12.3 Variable Monitoring ................................................................................. 460 Registering Variable/Comment ..........................................................................................461 Register All.........................................................................................................................464 Register by user .................................................................................................................466 Drag and Drop Register from other windows .....................................................................467 View Detailed/Briefly ..........................................................................................................469 Monitoring operations.........................................................................................................472 Find ....................................................................................................................................473 Print....................................................................................................................................473 Shortcut Keys.....................................................................................................................474 Alignment ...........................................................................................................................474

12.4 System Monitoring .................................................................................. 476 Basic Application................................................................................................................476 Connect/Disconnect ...........................................................................................................477 System Synchronization.....................................................................................................477 All I/O modules ON/OFF ....................................................................................................478 Selected I/O modules ON/OFF ..........................................................................................479 Change Current Value .......................................................................................................479 Information Display of Power Module.................................................................................480 Information Display of CPU module ...................................................................................482 Information Display of Communication Module ..................................................................483

Page 18: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Contents Symbol Definitions

xviii SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Viewing Information of Special Modules............................................................................ 486 Start/Stop Monitoring......................................................................................................... 488 Special Module Monitoring ................................................................................................ 488 Save .................................................................................................................................. 490 Open ................................................................................................................................. 490 Navigate Base................................................................................................................... 491 Print Preview ..................................................................................................................... 491

12.5 Address Monitoring .................................................................................493 Basic Application ............................................................................................................... 493 Address Areas................................................................................................................... 494 Data Format and Display Items......................................................................................... 494 Edit Data ........................................................................................................................... 495 Save Address .................................................................................................................... 496 Open Address ................................................................................................................... 498 Data Value Setting ............................................................................................................ 500 Clear Data ......................................................................................................................... 503 Write to PLC...................................................................................................................... 504 Read from PLC.................................................................................................................. 506 Write Selected Area on PLC ............................................................................................. 507 Start/Stop Monitoring......................................................................................................... 507 Change Current Value....................................................................................................... 508 PLC Type Settings ............................................................................................................ 510 Screen Zoom-In/Zoom-Out ............................................................................................... 510 Automatic Width/Height Adjustment .................................................................................. 510 View Properties ................................................................................................................. 511 Page Setting...................................................................................................................... 512

12.6 Special Module Monitoring .....................................................................514

12.7 Trend Monitoring......................................................................................517 Configuring Trend Monitoring ............................................................................................ 517 Start Trend Monitoring....................................................................................................... 519 Setting Trend Graph.......................................................................................................... 521 Setting graph..................................................................................................................... 522 Setting Graph Window ...................................................................................................... 526 Graph function................................................................................................................... 527 Scroll Synchronization....................................................................................................... 527

12.8 Data Traces...............................................................................................532 Connecting to PLC ............................................................................................................ 535 Trace Setting..................................................................................................................... 535 Graph settings ................................................................................................................... 541 Trace ................................................................................................................................. 543 Animation .......................................................................................................................... 544 Graph Function.................................................................................................................. 546 File function....................................................................................................................... 546 View Function.................................................................................................................... 548

Page 19: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Contents Symbol Definitions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xix 11/09 Honeywell

12.9 Custom Events......................................................................................... 551 Overview of Custom events ...............................................................................................551 Event Setting......................................................................................................................556 Adding Custom Event Item.................................................................................................558 Event History......................................................................................................................566

13. DEBUGGING..............................................................................573

13.1 Start/Stop Debugging.............................................................................. 573 Start Debugging .................................................................................................................573 Stop Debugging .................................................................................................................573

13.2 LD Program Debugging .......................................................................... 575 Set/Remove Breakpoints....................................................................................................575 Go ......................................................................................................................................578 Go to Cursor.......................................................................................................................579 Step Into.............................................................................................................................580

13.3 List of Break Points................................................................................. 587

13.4 Variable Break.......................................................................................... 589 Setting Variable Break .......................................................................................................589

13.5 Scan Break ............................................................................................... 592 Scan Break Run .................................................................................................................593

14. ONLINE EDITING.......................................................................595

14.1 Online Editing Sequence ........................................................................ 595 Open Project ......................................................................................................................596 Connect..............................................................................................................................596 Start Monitoring..................................................................................................................596 Start Online Editing ............................................................................................................596 Edit .....................................................................................................................................597 Write Modified Program......................................................................................................598 End Online Editing .............................................................................................................598

15. PRINTING...................................................................................601

15.1 Print Project ............................................................................................. 601 Printing a Project................................................................................................................601 Print Setting........................................................................................................................602 Page Setup ........................................................................................................................603 Header/Footer Setting........................................................................................................604 Cover Setup .......................................................................................................................606

Page 20: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Contents Symbol Definitions

xx SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

15.2 LD Program Print .....................................................................................610 Print Setting....................................................................................................................... 610 Print Preview ..................................................................................................................... 612

16. USER FUNCTION/FUNCTION BLOCK..................................... 613

16.1 Overview ...................................................................................................613

16.2 Create User Function/Function Block....................................................614 Create User Function/Function Block Program ................................................................. 614

16.3 Create User Function/Function Block I/O Variable...............................617

16.4 User Function/Function Block Programming .......................................619

16.5 Working with User Function/Function Block ........................................622

17. SOFTMASTER SIMULATOR .................................................... 625

17.1 Overview of the SoftMaster Simulator (SIM) .........................................625 Features of SoftMaster-SIM .............................................................................................. 625 System configuration for execution of SoftMaster-SIM...................................................... 625 Starting SoftMaster-SIM .................................................................................................... 626

17.2 Program window configuration ..............................................................629 Configuring the Program window ...................................................................................... 629 Channel list ....................................................................................................................... 630 Channel monitor ................................................................................................................ 631 I/O condition ...................................................................................................................... 632 I/O condition monitor ......................................................................................................... 646 Module simulation ............................................................................................................. 648 Digital I/O module.............................................................................................................. 649 Analog output module (D/A conversion module) ............................................................... 651 High Speed counter module (HSC Module) ...................................................................... 652 RTD module ...................................................................................................................... 653 Advanced positioning module (APM module).................................................................... 654

17.3 Limitations ................................................................................................662 Watchdog timer ................................................................................................................. 662 Communication module..................................................................................................... 662

18. ST EDITION............................................................................... 663

18.1 Writing ST program..................................................................................663 Adding Scan Program ....................................................................................................... 663 Adding User Function/Function Block ............................................................................... 664 Adding SFC transition, action............................................................................................ 666

Page 21: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Contents Symbol Definitions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xxi 11/09 Honeywell

18.2 Limit .......................................................................................................... 669

18.3 Editing Program....................................................................................... 670 Shortcut keys .....................................................................................................................670 Copy/Paste.........................................................................................................................671 Undo/Redo.........................................................................................................................672 Adding/Selecting variable...................................................................................................673 Inserting Function/Function Block ......................................................................................675

18.4 Viewing Program ..................................................................................... 677 ST option............................................................................................................................677 Font/Color ..........................................................................................................................679 Zoom..................................................................................................................................680 Tab.....................................................................................................................................680 Showing line numbers........................................................................................................681

18.5 Additional Edition Function.................................................................... 682 Book mark ..........................................................................................................................682 Selection from character string list .....................................................................................685 Selecting member variable from character string list..........................................................686 Setting/Removing Block Mask............................................................................................687 Setting/Removing Line Block Mask....................................................................................690 Indent/Outdent ...................................................................................................................693

19. EVENT INPUT MODULE............................................................695

19.1 Overview................................................................................................... 695 Characteristics of SOE Monitor ..........................................................................................695 Functions of the SOE Monitor ............................................................................................695 Files Created in the SOE Monitor.......................................................................................696

19.2 Screen Configuration .............................................................................. 696 Menu structure ...................................................................................................................697 Tools ..................................................................................................................................699 SOE Event History Window................................................................................................700 Status Bar ..........................................................................................................................701

19.3 Basic Parameter Setting ......................................................................... 702 Setting Items ......................................................................................................................702

19.4 I/O Parameter Setting .............................................................................. 703 Setting Item........................................................................................................................703 Chatter Setting ...................................................................................................................706

19.5 View Module Information ........................................................................ 708

19.6 Event History Monitor ............................................................................. 710 Example of Event filter .......................................................................................................714 Prioritizing Events .............................................................................................................714

Page 22: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Contents Symbol Definitions

xxii SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Comparing Events............................................................................................................. 716 Deleting Event history ....................................................................................................... 717

19.7 Save as an Excel File ...............................................................................718

20. DEDICATED ML200R FUNCTION ............................................ 719

20.1 Redundancy Parameter...........................................................................719

20.2 Redundancy PLC State Window.............................................................722

20.3 Control Redundancy................................................................................723 Change of master CPU ..................................................................................................... 723 Standby CPU control......................................................................................................... 724

20.4 System Monitoring...................................................................................725 System Configuration ....................................................................................................... 725 Node Count Change.......................................................................................................... 727 Base Information .............................................................................................................. 728 Base Changing Wizard...................................................................................................... 732

21. WARRANTY .............................................................................. 739

21.1 Terms of warranty ....................................................................................739

21.2 Range of warranty....................................................................................739

Page 23: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 25 11/09 Honeywell

1. Introduction

1.1 Features of SoftMaster SoftMaster is a software tool designed to program and debug the MasterLogic 200 PLC series. Following are some of the key features of SoftMaster.

Multi-PLC, Multi-Program

Edit, monitor and manage ML200 PLCs included in a project.

Enables multiple Scan programs and Task programs

Drag and Drop option

Easy and convenient editing with Drag and Drop function on most editors such as Project, Variable/Comment, LD Edit, Variable Monitor, and so on.

Shortcut Keys

The default shortcut keys provided are customizable.

Message Windows

Different message windows to edit and check programs.

Convenient Variable/Comment Editing

Option to edit using MS Excel

Edit option is available through View Variable, View Address, and View Flag.

Auto-fill function to fill similar Variables

Drag and Drop option on the Variable/Comment Windows.

Convenient Program Edit

Unlimited Undo/Redo function

Block Edit available in cell

Independent screen-level Edit

Enhanced Find/Replace function

Block Mask function to prohibit execution in rung.

Bookmark function for access to a specific location in a LD program.

Page 24: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

1. Introduction 1.1. Features of SoftMaster

26 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Allows reference to memory of selected address when editing LD

Monitoring Functions

Monitoring functions for variable monitoring, address monitoring, system monitoring, trend monitoring, special module monitoring.

Custom Events

Logging and reading data available if user defined conditions are met for a specific address

Module Changing Wizard

Easy and safe change of module during PLC RUN

Page 25: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

1. Introduction 1.2. System Requirements

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 27 11/09 Honeywell

1.2 System Requirements The following are the system requirements of SoftMaster:

Item Specification

Personal Computer and Memory A Pentium computer and 128MB memory

COM Port RS-232C serial port or USB port

Hard Disk At least 100MB or more space.

Monitor Monitor should have 1024 x 768 and higher resolution.

Windows Compatible with Windows 2000/XP.

ATTENTION

It is recommended to install SoftMaster on Windows 2000 or XP.

Page 26: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

1. Introduction 1.2. System Requirements

28 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Page 27: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 29 11/09 Honeywell

2. Installation

2.1 SoftMaster Installation

Installing SoftMaster

To install SoftMaster, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Execute the installation file.

2 Installation Wizard prepares for installation as in the following illustration.

Page 28: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.1. SoftMaster Installation

30 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

3 Enter your name and company name. Click Next.

You are prompted to specify the folder to install SoftMaster.

4 The default installation folder is displayed. If you want to change the folder, click Browse… to select a new folder. SoftMaster needs 30 MB of free disk space. In case of inadequate free space, you are prompted to select a disk with enough capacity.

Page 29: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.1. SoftMaster Installation

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 31 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

After selecting a folder, click Next.

Page 30: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.1. SoftMaster Installation

32 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

5 The installation progress is displayed as follows:

The installation may take a few minutes.

Page 31: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.1. SoftMaster Installation

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 33 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

6 Click Finish to complete the installation.

Page 32: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.2. USB Device Driver Installation

34 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

2.2 USB Device Driver Installation

Installing the USB Device driver

If you are installing SoftMaster on Windows 2000, the USB device driver is installed automatically. However, in the case of Windows XP, you may need to install the USB device driver separately.

TIP

If your OS is Windows 2000, SoftMaster is installed with USB device driver automatically. However, in case of Window XP, the driver has to be additionally installed.

To install USB Device drivers, perform the following steps:

ATTENTION

Ensure that a \Drivers sub-folder is created under the folder where SoftMaster is installed, and there are 2 driver files- GmUSBD.sys and GmUSBD.inf in the Drivers folder. If there is no folder or driver file, reinstall SoftMaster.

Page 33: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.2. USB Device Driver Installation

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 35 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

1 Turn PLC power ON and connect USB device to the PC.

If the connection is established, the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box is displayed.

3 Select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced) and click Next to continue.

You are prompted to choose search and installation options.

Page 34: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.2. USB Device Driver Installation

36 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

4 Select “Search for the best driver in these locations” and select “Include this location in the search”.

Page 35: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.2. USB Device Driver Installation

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 37 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

5 Click Browse. On the Browse Folder dialog box, select Drivers’ folder where SoftMaster is installed.

Page 36: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.2. USB Device Driver Installation

38 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

6 Click OK. Then, the computer starts searching for the driver files in the selected folder.

Page 37: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.2. USB Device Driver Installation

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 39 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

7 If the computer found the most suitable device driver, you prompted to begin installing the selected device driver. Since USB device driver operated stably based on Windows OS, click Continue Anyway.

Page 38: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.2. USB Device Driver Installation

40 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

8 If the device driver has been installed completely, the Installation Complete Dialog is displayed as follows. Click Finish to complete the installation of the driver.

Page 39: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.2. USB Device Driver Installation

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 41 11/09 Honeywell

Verifying the USB device driver installation

If USB connection is not available, check the installation status of the device driver as follows:

Step Action

1 On the desktop, right-click on My Computer icon and select Manage from the menu.

2 Computer Management dialog box is displayed as shown in the following figure. On the left tree list of dialog box, click Computer Management (Local)] > System Tools > Device Manager] in regular order. The items displayed on the right list may be different according to devices installed on the computer.

Page 40: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.2. USB Device Driver Installation

42 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Normal Case

The USB device driver for MasterLogic 200 PLC has been installed successfully, if the list Honeywell MasterLogic Series appears with the figure under Universal Serial Bus Controller.

Page 41: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.2. USB Device Driver Installation

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 43 11/09 Honeywell

Abnormal Case

The device driver has not been installed successfully, if the following figure is displayed.

Page 42: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.2. USB Device Driver Installation

44 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

If the USB driver for MasterLogic 200 PLC is not installed successfully, reinstall the USB driver for MasterLogic 200 PLC in the following steps.

Step Action

1 On the device driver with the icon with an exclamation mark, right-click the mouse and select Update Driver from the context menu.

Page 43: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.2. USB Device Driver Installation

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 45 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

2 H/W Update Wizard dialog box appears. Select the option “Installation from a list or specific location (Advanced)” and click Next. The next sequence is manually the same as in Installation of Device Driver.

Page 44: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.2. USB Device Driver Installation

46 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

If the USB driver for MasterLogic 200 PLC is not installed successfully, reinstall the USB driver for MasterLogic 200 PLC in the following steps

Step Action

1 If the device driver has been installed incorrectly or in error, execute H/W Update Wizard. Select the option “Installation from a list or specific location (Advanced)” and click Next.

Page 45: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.2. USB Device Driver Installation

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 47 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

2 On search and installation options, select Don’t Search. I will choose the driver to install and click Next.

Page 46: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.2. USB Device Driver Installation

48 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

3 Click Have Disk… on the dialog box below.

4 If Installation dialog box is displayed on the disk, click Browse.

Page 47: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.2. USB Device Driver Installation

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 49 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

5 From the Browse File dialog box, move to the folder SoftMaster is installed in. Select drivers folder to display GmUSBD.inf file. With this file selected, click Open.

6 On the item of ‘Copy manufacturer’s files from’, a directory with the file of the device driver is displayed. Click OK.

Page 48: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.2. USB Device Driver Installation

50 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

7 On ‘Show compatible hardware’ list of the device driver Select dialog box, select “Honeywell MLSeries” driver and then click Next.

Page 49: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.2. USB Device Driver Installation

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 51 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

8 Hardware Installation dialog box appears. Click Continue Anyway to go on with the installation

Page 50: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

2. Installation 2.2. USB Device Driver Installation

52 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

9 Completing the Hardware Update dialog box appears. Click Finish to end the installation of the driver.

Page 51: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 53 11/09 Honeywell

3. Basic Application

3.1 SoftMaster user interface

Understanding the SoftMaster user interface

The following is an illustration of the SoftMaster user interface. The user interface of SoftMaster can be described as follows:

UI area Description

A Menu bar: It is the basic menu bar of SoftMaster.

B Tool bar: The toolbar below the menu bar contain buttons and commands to access frequently used tasks.

Page 52: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

54 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

UI area Description

C Project window: Displays the components of the currently open project

D Variable Monitoring window: Used to register and monitor variables.

E Status bar: Used to display the status of SoftMaster, the information of the connected PLC, etc.

F Edit window: Displays the current LD Edit window.

G Message window: Displays messages when the SoftMaster is in use.

Menu bar

Selecting a menu item displays the options under the menu. Click a menu item and select an option from the drop-down list of menu options. You can also access the menu using the shortcut keys.

Page 53: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 55 11/09 Honeywell

Project menu

The following is an illustration of the components of the Project menu.

The following table lists the Project menu options with their description:

Menu option Description

New Project Creates a new project.

Open Project Opens an existing project.

Open from PLC Uploads the project and program stored in PLC.

Save Project Saves the project.

Save As Allows you to save the project with a different name.

Close Project Closes the project.

Page 54: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

56 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Menu option Description

PLC Adds a new PLC to the project.

Task Adds a new task program to the project.

Program Adds a new scan program to the project.

Function Adds a new Function to the project.

Function Block Adds a new Function Block to the project.

Add Item

Data type Adds a new Data type to the project.

PLC Imports the PLC program from the file.

Global Variables/Address

Imports Global Variables/Address from the file.

Program Imports the program from the file.

I/O parameter Imports the I/O parameter from the file.

Basic parameter Imports the basic parameter from the file.

Import Item from File

Function/FB… Imports the Function/FB from the file/

Export to File Exports the selected item on the project window into the file.

Save Variable Names to File Saves variable names to a file.

Compare Projects Compares two projects stored in the PC and displays its result.

Print Prints the active window’s details.

Preview Displays a preview of the screen to be printed.

Print Project Enables selection of a project item for printing.

Print Setup Sets the printer options.

Exit Ends SoftMaster.

Page 55: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 57 11/09 Honeywell

Edit Menu

Menu option Description

Undo Cancels the edit on Program Edit Window to recover its previous status.

Redo Recovers the edit cancelled using Undo.

Cut Copies the selected block to clipboard and deletes the block.

Copy Copies the selected block to the clipboard.

Paste Copies from the clipboard and pastes on the Edit Window.

Page 56: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

58 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Menu option Description

Delete Deletes the selected block or items.

Select All Selects all block of currently active window.

Insert Mode Changes program edit mode to insert mode.

Insert Line Adds a new line to the cursor position.

Delete Line Deletes the line from the cursor position

Insert Cell Adds a cell available to the cursor position.

Delete Cell Deletes a cell from the cursor position.

Register Special/Communication Module Variables

Registers special module variables in global variables list and deletes previous list.

Optimize Program Optimizes the program automatically.

Insert Comment/Label Insert a comment or label in the cursor position.

Set Block Mask Sets cursor-positioned rung or specified block area Block Mask in rung unit.

Remove Block Mask Removes cursor-positioned rung or specified block area set Block Mask.

Set/Remove Sets or removes a bookmark.

Remove All Cancels all the bookmarks specified.

Previous Bookmark Moves to the previous bookmark.

Bookmark

Next Bookmark Moves to the next bookmark.

Tools Edit Tools for each program are available.

Page 57: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 59 11/09 Honeywell

Find/Replace

Menu Option Description

Find Address Find variable address

Find Text Search for variable based on the variable name

Replace Address Replace variable address with another address.

Replace Text Replace variable name with some other text

Find Again Search again.

Step/line Moves the cursor to the position of a specific step/line.

Rung comment Moves the cursor to the position of a specific rung comment.

Label Moves the cursor to the position of a specific label.

Go to

END Command Moves the cursor to the position of END Command.

Previous Message Moves from the message window to the place the previous message indicates.

Next Message Moves from the message window to the place the next message indicates.

Page 58: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

60 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

View

Menu Description

IL Converts to IL View during LD Edit.

Project Window Shows or hides the project window.

Message Window Shows or hides the message window.

Variable Monitoring Window Shows or hides the variable monitor window.

Instruction Window Shows or hides the instruction window.

Cross Reference Displays the used-memory information on the message window’s Cross

Page 59: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 61 11/09 Honeywell

Menu Description

Reference tab.

Used Address Lists all the memory addresses which are used in the program.

Check Program Checks the program and displays its result on the message window’s Check Program tab.

Variables Displays the variable name in the program.

Address Indicates the Memory address.

Flags Indicates default System defined flags.

Address/Variables Displays the address and the variable in the program.

Address/Comments Displays the address and the comment in the program.

Variables/Comments Displays the variable and the comment in the program.

Zoom-In Magnifies the screen.

Zoom-Out Reduces the screen.

Resize Width Automatically adjusts the cell width to the string width in the Variable/Comment window.

Resize Height Automatically adjusts the cell height applicably to the string height in the LD or Variable/Comment window.

Full Screen Enlarge the program window or Variable/Comment window applicably to the whole screen.

Properties Displays the registered information of the selected item on the project window.

LD Properties Displays the LD properties in the program.

Change Columns Increase or decrease the columns in the program screen.

Page 60: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

62 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Menu Description

Open Local Variables Converts from the program screen to the local variable screen.

Open User Function Opens user defined program.

Open Program Converts from the local variable screen to the program screen.

Online

Page 61: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 63 11/09 Honeywell

Menu Description

Connect/Disconnect Connects or disconnects with PLC.

Connection Settings Specifies the connection method.

Run

Stop

Change Mode

Debug

Changes PLC mode.

Read Reads parameter/program/comment from PLC.

Write Writes parameter/program/comment on PLC.

Compare with PLC Compares the project to the project saved in PLC

Set Flash Memory Copies the Program into PLC Flash memory if enabled.

Reset PLC Resets PLC.

Clear PLC Deletes parameter/program/comment saved in PLC.

PLC Information Displays PLC information.

PLC History Displays PLC history.

PLC Errors/Warnings Displays PLC error/warning information.

I/O Information PLC I/O Sync. And displays information

Save PLC History Saves PLC History

Force I/O Displays the window for compulsory I/O setting.

Skip I/O Displays the window for I/O skip setting.

Fault Mask Displays the window for fault mask setting.

Module Changing Wizard Displays the dialog window to change modules.

Base Changing Wizard Changes base while PLC is operating.

Start Online Editing Displays the dialog box to edit the program online when the PLC is running.

Page 62: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

64 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Menu Description

Write Modified Program Displays the dialog box to download the edited program online when the PLC is running. The modified program gets activated online.

End Online Editing This ends the Online editing session and the program comes back to normal operation

Monitor

Menu Description

Start/Stop Monitoring Starts or stops the monitor.

Pause Temporarily stops the monitor.

Resume Restarts the monitor temporarily stopped.

Pausing Conditions Specifies conditions for the monitor temporary stop.

Change Current Value Specifies the address value being monitored.

System Monitoring Executes the system monitor.

Page 63: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 65 11/09 Honeywell

Menu Description

Address Monitoring Execute the Address monitor window which shows all memory area addresses.

Special Module Monitoring Executes the special module monitor.

Trend Monitoring Executes the trend monitor.

PID Monitoring Monitors all or individual PID block.

SOE Monitoring Monitors the events which are entered into the CPU and event input modules.

Custom Events Specifies the custom events.

Data Traces Specifies the address to monitor the change of the data.

Debug

Menu Description

Start/Stop Debugging Converts to Debug mode to Start/Stop Debugging.

Go Runs to the break point.

Step Over Runs step by step.

Step Into Debugs the subroutine.

Page 64: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

66 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Menu Description

Step Out Escapes from the subroutine.

Go to Cursor Runs to the cursor position.

Set/Remove Breakpoints Sets or cancels the break point.

Breakpoints List Displays the list of the break points specified.

Breakpoint Conditions Specifies the break conditions

Tools

Menu Description

Network Manager Shows the PLC network and specifies the parameter.

Start/End Simulator Starts or ends the simulator.

Customize User defines tools and instructions.

Shortcut Settings User specifies the Shortcut Keys.

Options Changeable applicably to SoftMaster environment by user.

Create Host ID This creates the host ID file. Host ID is required to get the license.

Page 65: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 67 11/09 Honeywell

Window

Menu Description

New Window Opens a new window on the active window.

Split Splits the Project window.

Cascade Arranges the several windows of SoftMaster in steps.

Tile Horizontally Arranges the several windows of SoftMaster horizontally

Tile Vertically Arranges the several windows of SoftMaster vertically

Arrange Icons Arranges the icons of SoftMaster.

Close All Closes all the windows of SoftMaster.

Help

Instruction Description

SoftMaster Help Opens Help for SoftMaster application.

Instruction Help Opens Help for PLC instructions.

About SoftMaster Displays SoftMaster information.

Page 66: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

68 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Tool Bar

SoftMaster provides shortcut icons for frequently used menus on the tool bar. Click a tool to execute.

Creating a custom tool bar

To create a custom Tool Bar, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Tools > Customize.

The Customize dialog box is displayed.

Page 67: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 69 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Select the tool bars to show/hide.

2 Click New.

The New Tool bar dialog box is displayed.

Page 68: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

70 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

3 Enter a name for the new tool bar.

4 Click OK to create a tool bar with no tools.

Filling the Tool Box

This menu is used to populate the tool box created with custom tools. To fill the tool box, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the Command tab on the customize dialog box.

2 Select the menus that you want as a part of the new tool bar.

3 Click OK to create the new tool bar.

Status Display Line

As depicted in the following illustration, the Status Display line is used to display the following:

Legend Description

Tool tip of selected toolbar item

Used to display the comment of the selected menu, instruction or mouse-positioned tool box.

Name of the PLC

Indicates the name of the selected PLC name. If a project has several PLCs, online-related instructions are applied to the PLC displayed here. (Example: New PLC)

PLC Mode display

Used to display the PLC mode. If several PLCs are in a project, the selected PLC’s mode is displayed. (Example: Run)

Warning Display Indicates the error status in the PLC. (Example: R1, Ethernet, OK)

Page 69: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 71 11/09 Honeywell

Legend Description

Cursor Position Indicates the cursor position when a program is edited. (Example: Row 9, Column 5)

Mode Indicates the insert mode or overwrite mode.

Change View Window

All the windows (such as project window, result window, etc.) available in View menu are composed of docking-available windows. Use the mouse to adjust the position and the size of the windows or to hide the windows.

Move Position with the left mouse button pressed, drag the mark “ ” to another position. The following figure shows the project window moved downward.

Page 70: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

72 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Page 71: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 73 11/09 Honeywell

Change to Open Window

Right-click the mouse on a window and choose Float In Main Window from the context menu.

Page 72: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

74 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Hide

Select Hide from the right-click context menu on the window.

Page 73: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 75 11/09 Honeywell

Application of dialog box

A dialog box in which you can enter or specify the required value.

Page 74: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface

76 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Field Label Description

Input Used to enter a specific string using keys.

List Box Used to select an item on the list. Press the list box arrow to display the list with the item to click and select.

Options Used to select just one item in the same group. Use the mouse to select the specific item.

OK If OK is clicked, the specified value is input.

Cancel If Cancel is clicked, the specified value is not to be input but the previous status is kept.

Page 75: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.2. Open/Close Project

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 77 11/09 Honeywell

3.2 Open/Close Project

Open Project

To open the project, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Project > Open Project

2 Select Project File and then click Open.

TIP

The extension of SoftMaster project file is “.xgp”. On the Open dialog box, select Project File to check the project comment in the comment area.

Close Project

To close the project, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Project > Close Project on the menu.

2 If the project is not saved after editing, the following message appears.

3 Click Yes to save.

Page 76: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.2. Open/Close Project

78 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Save Project

To save the project, perform the following:

On the menu, select Project > Save Project.

TIP

The mark “*” displayed to the right of the project name on the project window indicates that the current project has been edited.

Page 77: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.3. Edit Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 79 11/09 Honeywell

3.3 Edit Functions These functions are available in LD, IL, Variable/Comment, Variable Monitor and Project Window. Variable/Comment and Excel can share the edited details with each other.

Cut-Paste

It is used for selecting blocks to move to other places.

Cut > Paste menu is used to move the data of the selected area to a new position to paste the data on. The example of Cut > Paste on the Variable/Comment Window is as follows.

Page 78: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.3. Edit Functions

80 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Copy – Paste

Copy > Paste menu is used to create data identical to the data of the selected area. At this time, in case the variable name is duplicated as described in Variable/Comment, an applicable warning message appears. Refer to the comment of each edit window for more details. The example of Copy > Paste in LD figure is as follows.

Drag and Drop

Drag & Drop is used to apply either Cut > Paste or Copy > Paste. When dragging and dropping in a same area such as same LD or IL window, it applies Cut > Paste; if dragging and dropping with two and more SoftMaster Program instances opened, it applies Copy > Paste.

Page 79: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.4. Shortcut Keys

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 81 11/09 Honeywell

TIP

Cut, Copy and Paste can be also controlled by the mouse context menu in Edit window.

Copy/Paste in Variable/Comment or LD/IL Edit is verified for the duplication by the program. However, it should be also checked manually by a user.

Program does not respond if Cut, Copy or Paste is operated in an unavailable area.

Cut, Copy or Paste from/to different areas may cause fatal program errors.

Auto conversion function is not provided when Cut, Copy or Paste is attempted from/to different areas. Therefore, a user should check the pasted area.

3.4 Shortcut Keys

Configuring shortcut keys

Shortcut Keys can be specified for all the instructions. When you set new shortcut keys for a task the existing shortcut is deleted.

To set the shortcut key for an instruction, perform the following:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Tools > Shortcut Settings.

Page 80: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.4. Shortcut Keys

82 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Field Label Description

Select a macro Used to select the menu to specify its shortcut key on the list.

Create Shortcut Used to create a shortcut key for the selected menu.

Remove Deletes the specified shortcut key.

Reset All Deletes all the shortcut keys specified and resets all to default.

2 From the Select a macro list, select the menu to specify its shortcut key.

3 Click Create Shortcut.

4 Click the shortcut key to set. For example, to apply Alt + Z, press Alt and Z on the keyboard. A shortcut key is displayed on the Edit Window. If this key association is already used, a menu applicable to the specified shortcut key is displayed.

5 Click OK to save the shortcut.

Page 81: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.5. Edit Window Zoom In, Zoom Out

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 83 11/09 Honeywell

3.5 Edit Window Zoom In, Zoom Out

Zooming in/Zooming out

This function is used for magnifying or reducing the Edit Window. The applicable magnification rate changes by a minimum of 5% within the range of 50% ~ 200%.

To zoom in/zoom out the edit window, perform the following steps:

Select View > Zoom In or View > Zoom Out on the menu as necessary. Or use the combo box to select or enter a specific magnification rate. Or together with Ctrl being pressed, use the mouse wheel to adjust the rate. The two figures below show the examples of 50% and 200% magnified screens.

Page 82: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.6. Customizing SoftMaster

84 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

3.6 Customizing SoftMaster This function allows you to configure the default folder for storing projects, set the common editor, and configures the font/color for LD, SFC and ST.

1. Category: Used for classifying the SoftMaster option applied to entire program and option applied to language like tree.

2. Setting contents: If you select [a]’s category, it displays contents of each category.

3. Entire button: Affects the entire category regardless of selected category. Reset category button is used to reset all value of option.

a b

c

Page 83: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.6. Customizing SoftMaster

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 85 11/09 Honeywell

Configuring SoftMaster options

To configure custom options for SoftMaster, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Tools > Options.

2 Select SoftMaster in the Option dialog box.

Field Label Description

Default folder for new projects

Used to select location where to make new project.

Select Folder Searches the directory.

Number of backup file(s) Sets the backup file number to restore project file. You can set up to max. 20.

Number of recent projects to display

Displays a list no. of the recently opened project file in the Menu Project > Recent Project You can set up to max. 20

Open previous project when starting the SoftMaster.

If you check it, SoftMaster opens the last file used automatically when SoftMaster starts.

Integrated connection and When executing SoftMaster-NM through

Page 84: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.6. Customizing SoftMaster

86 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

file with SoftMaster-NM SoftMaster menu, make connection option of SoftMaster and PLC name displayed at SoftMaster-NM identically.

3 Click OK.

Setting Common Editor

To display the Common editor, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Tools > Options.

2 Select Common Editor and select items you want to change.

Page 85: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.6. Customizing SoftMaster

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 87 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

The following table provides a brief description of Common Editor Settings.

Field Label Description

Output cross reference instantly

When editing the LD program, displays Cross reference contents automatically about selected address. When not checking this option, selects [View]-[Cross Reference] on the menu and checks memory usage result.

Check duplicated coil instantly

Checks the duplicated coils during editing and displays it in the result window.

Instant input mode When user enters some contact, displays the address input window for user to enter the address. When this is not checked, user double-clicks the contact or presses ‘Enter’ with cursor on the contact to edit it

Show line numbers Displays line number.

Show grid Displays grid

SoftMaster font/color option

It is available to change font/color used in the editing window. You can also set the font color for LD, SFC and ST.

To change the font/color, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Tools > Options.

2 Select Font/Color and select items you want to change.

Page 86: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.6. Customizing SoftMaster

88 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Field Label Description

Items Selects the items that you want to change font/color.

Font It is activated when item is Text font. It designates text font.

Color It is activated when item is not Text font. It designates color.

Default Restore to default value.

Preview Displays the current setting status.

SoftMaster online option

SoftMaster Online-related options can be specified.

To specify the online-related options, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Tools > Options.

Page 87: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.6. Customizing SoftMaster

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 89 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

2 Select Online in the category.

Type: Sets monitor display type of data value.

Example: It you select hexadecimal, variable is displayed as hexadecimal number when monitoring.

Type Ex) function block ADD

Unsigned decimal

Page 88: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.6. Customizing SoftMaster

90 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Signed decimal

Hexadecimal -

As instruction

As variable

View connection settings when connecting: Used to display the specified

details of the connection with PLC automatically when connected. If the option View connection settings when connecting is selected, the following dialog box appears whenever PLC is connected with.

Page 89: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.6. Customizing SoftMaster

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 91 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Show Message when changing the PLC mode: When changing the PLC, selects to display conversion message automatically. When changing stop mode to run mode, the following message displays.

Contrary, when changing run mode to stop mode, the following message displays.

Page 90: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.6. Customizing SoftMaster

92 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Configuring LD option

You can change text and column width of LD editor.

To display the LD option, perform the following steps.

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Tools > Options.

2 Select LD from the Options dialog box.

3 Field Label Description

Display above text When displaying text above diagram, decides whether to display height of text as variable type according to the number of character or as fixed type according to setting.

Display below text When displaying text below diagram, decides whether to display height of text as variable type according to the number of character or as fixed type according to setting.

Display Specified column width of LD diagram.

Page 91: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.6. Customizing SoftMaster

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 93 11/09 Honeywell

LD Font/Color option

You can change Font/Color used in LD editor.

To set the LD font/color option, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Tools > Options.

2 Select Font/Color in LD category and select items you want to change.

3 Field Label Description

Items Used to select the area to specify its font or color.

Font Activated when item is Variable/Comment, specifies font of Variable/Comment.

Color Activated when item is not Variable/Comment, specifies color.

Default For selected item, restore default value.

Preview Displays the setting value of the selected item.

Page 92: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.6. Customizing SoftMaster

94 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Configuring SFC option

Options used when editing SFC program.

To display the SFC option, perform the following steps.

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Tools > Options.

2 Select SFC from the Options dialog box.

3 Field Label Description

Show comment Shows comment of step, transition, action and block.

Show print area Shows print-able area with the thick dotted line.

Show page number Shows page number in print-able area

Step column width Specifies column width of step, transition.

Action column width Specifies column width of action.

Utilize SFC split window You can use SFC split window.

Page 93: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.6. Customizing SoftMaster

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 95 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Split window position Decides split widow position.

Split window contents Decides which content to display.

ATTENTION

Range of step column width is 20~200.

Range of action column width is 70~400.

SFC Font/Color option

You can change Font/Color used in SFC editor.

To set the SFC font/color option, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Tools > Options.

2 Select Font/Color in SFC category and select items you want to change.

Page 94: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.6. Customizing SoftMaster

96 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

3 Field Label Description

Items Used to select the area to specify its font or color.

Font Activated when item is Variable/Comment, specifies font of Variable/Comment.

Color Activated when item is not Variable/Comment, specifies color.

Default For selected item, restore default value.

Preview Displays the setting value of the selected item.

Configuring ST option

Options used in editing ST program.

To display the ST option, perform the following steps.

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Tools > Options.

2 Select ST from the Options dialog box.

Page 95: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.6. Customizing SoftMaster

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 97 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 Field Label Description

Parameter information Exclusive of 2MLK CPU.

Auto list members When entering character with keyboard, shows instruction and variable starting with inputted character.

Auto macro statement When entering control statement such as IF, WHILE, SWITCH and pressing Enter key, complete the statement according to ST grammar.

Tab size Specifies space size when pressing Tab key.

Auto indent When changing line with Enter key, indented automatically as many as previous tab size.

Enhance Shows character string with diverse color according to variable, reserved word, comment and instruction.

Page 96: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

3. Basic Application 3.6. Customizing SoftMaster

98 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ST Font/Color option

You can change Font/Color used in ST editor.

To set the ST font/color option, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Tools > Options.

2 Select Font/Color in ST category and select items you want to change.

3 Field Label Description

Items Used to select the area to specify its font or color.

Font Activated when item is Variable/Comment, specifies font of Variable/Comment.

Color Activated when item is not Variable/Comment, specifies color.

Default For selected item, restore default value.

Preview Displays the setting value of the selected item.

Page 97: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 99 11/09 Honeywell

4. Project Configuration

4.1 Overview of Project Configuration

Project configuration window

The components of the project configuration window are as follows.

Page 98: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.1. Overview of Project Configuration

100 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Legend Item Name Description

a Project Used to specify the whole system. Several PLCs related can be included in one project.

b PLC Displays the system applicable to a CPU module.

c Global/Direct Variables Global variable declaration and direct variable text can be edited and viewed.

d Parameter Used to specify the details on operation and configuration of PLC system.

e Basic Parameters Used to specify the basic operation.

f I/O Parameters Used to specify the I/O module configuration.

g User Data type Defines a structure type.

h Scan Program Used as the folder for all the programs.

i New program Folder for Local Variables and user written scan programs.

j Scan Program 2 Folder for Local Variables and user written scan programs.

k Task1 User defined task with a fixed cycle.

l Task Program1 Folder for Local Variables and user written Task programs.

m User function/function block

Custom function/function block created by the user.

n Function1 Folder for Local Variables and user written functions.

TIP

A project can include several PLCs. This way, SoftMaster can be used to conveniently manage and monitor several PLCs simultaneously.

Page 99: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.2. Project Management

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 101 11/09 Honeywell

4.2 Project Management

Creating a new project

It is used to create a new project. A folder with a name identical to the project name is created and the project file is saved in this folder.

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Project > New Project.

The following dialog box is displayed

Page 100: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.2. Project Management

102 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Field Label Description

Project name Used to enter the project name, which is the name of the project file. The extension of the project file is “.xgp”.

File directory A folder whose name is identical to the project name as specified by the user is created and the project file is stored in this folder.

Select Folder Browse to select a folder to store the project file.

PLC series Select ML-200, ML-50, ML-200 IEC or ML-200R as the PLC type.

CPU type Select the type of CPU

Program name Enter the name of a program included in a project.

Program language Select the program language as LD, SFC or ST.

Project description Enter a description for the project.

TIP

When you create a new project, it is stored in a folder with a name that is identical to the project name. The extension of “.xgp” is automatically attached to the project file if it is not specified.

Opening the Project

To open an existing project, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Project > Open Project from the menu bar.

The following dialog box is displayed.

Page 101: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.2. Project Management

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 103 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

2

3 Select a Project and click Open.

Note: When you select a project, the user defined comment appears in the comment section of the dialog box. This helps in selecting projects.

Opening a project from PLC

It is used to read the project stored in PLC, to make a new project. If the project is already open in SoftMaster, this project is closed to create a new project.

To create a new project, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Project > Open from PLC.

2 Select an object to connect, on the Online Settings and click OK.

Refer to Connect Options in On-line for details on connection settings.

3 A new project is created.

Page 102: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.2. Project Management

104 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

TIP

Select Project > Save Project to save the project read from the PLC in the PC.

Select Online > Read to read the items of PLC and import to the currently open Project.

Saving a Project

It is used to save changes in a project.

To save a Project, on the menu bar, select Project > Save Project.

TIP

If items in the project have changed and need to be saved, “*” is displayed beside the project name in the project window.

Saving Project as

It is used to save the project as a different file name.

To save the project, with a different file name:

Page 103: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.2. Project Management

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 105 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Project > Save As.

2 Enter a new project file name and select a folder, where you want to save the project file

Field Label Description

File name Used to enter the name of the project. The project file is stored with that name. The extension of the project file is “.xgp”

File directory The last saved file path is displayed for saving the current file. In case of a first-time save, the default folder name displayed is identical to the name of the project.

Select Folder Browse to select a folder to store the project file.

3 Click OK.

Page 104: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

106 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

4.3 Project Item

Add item

PLC, task and program can be added into the project.

Perform the following procedure to Add PLC.

Step Action

1 On the project window, select the Project Item.

2 On the menu, select Project > Add Item >PLC.

Page 105: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 107 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 Enter the PLC name, PLC type, and PLC description, and then click OK, to create a new PLC, as displayed in the following figure.

Page 106: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

108 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

TIP

SoftMaster allows the user to specify the project and include several PLCs in one project for convenient program management.

Add Task

REFERENCE - INTERNAL

For additional information on the operation and details of the task, see 2MLK CPU manual.

Page 107: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 109 11/09 Honeywell

To add a task, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 In the project window, select the PLC Item.

2 On the menu, select Project > Add Item > Task.

3 Enter the Task name, Priority, Task Number and Execution Condition, and then click OK, to create a new Task, as displayed in the following figure.

Page 108: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

110 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Field Label Description

Task name Enter the name of the task. The name must not include special characters.

Priority Used to specify the priority of the tasks. A lower figure indicates a higher priority. Lower the figure, higher is the priority.

Task number It is a unique number used to identify and manage the tasks in PLC. The Task number can change based on the

Page 109: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 111 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Execution condition. ( Ex. Fixed Cycle: 0 ~ 31)

Execution condition Used to specify the execution condition under which the task is executed.

Internal address execution condition

Setting items are different according to the type of internal address.

Address Used to enter the address which is used as the start condition of task program. Enter BIT or WORD address according to the condition to execute task program.

Word address start condition The start condition is specified if WORD type of the internal address start condition is selected.

Bit address start condition The start condition is specified if BIT type of the internal address start condition is selected.

TIP

Execution condition may be different according to the PLC type.

Initialization: The initialization task is executed when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN. It is executed until the _INIT_DONE (F10250) Flag is ON. And while the initialization task is executed, the programs (including the Scan Program) which belong to other tasks is not executed.

Fixed Cycle: The task is executed at the specified intervals of time. Enter the time in ms unit.

External contact point: The task is executed if specified external contact point is ON. The relative external address should be entered.

Example) %P00016

Internal address: The task is executed based on the status of internal address. The setup item is different according to the type of internal address.

Page 110: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

112 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Adding a Program

To add a Program, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 In the project window, select the Program Location to add. The program can be added to Scan Program or Task Item.

2 On the menu, select Project > Add Item > Program.

Page 111: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 113 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 Enter the Program name, language, and Program Description, and then click OK.

Page 112: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

114 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Exporting to file

The following items can be saved as separate item files.

Item File Extension

PLC plc

Global/direct variables gdv

I/O parameter iop

Basic parameter bsp

Program prg

Use function/function block fun

Exporting PLC Configuration

To export a PLC, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the project window, select the PLC.

2 On the menu, select Project > Export to File > PLC.

3 Enter the file name and then click OK.

Page 113: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 115 11/09 Honeywell

Exporting Variable/Comment

To export a Variable/Comment, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 In the project window, select the Variable/Comment Item.

2 On the menu, select Project > Export to File > Variable/Comment.

3 Enter the file name, and then click OK.

Exporting I/O Parameters

To export I/O Parameters, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 In the project window, select the I/O Parameter Item.

2 On the menu, select Project > Export to File > I/O Parameter.

3 Enter the file name, and then click OK.

Exporting Basic Parameters

To export basic parameters, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 In the project window, select the Basic Parameter Item.

2 On the menu, select Project > Export to File > Basic Parameter.

3 Enter the file name, and then click OK.

Exporting a Program

To export a Program, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 In the project window, select the Program Item.

2 On the menu, select Project > Export to File > Program.

Page 114: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

116 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

3 Enter the file name, and then click OK.

TIP

Items can be easily copied or moved between the projects using the Drag and Drop function.

Drag and drop function is available between projects, when two SoftMaster projects are open.

Importing from file

The following components can be saved as separate files and replaced by saved files.

Item File extension

PLC plc

Global/direct variables gdv

I/O parameter iop

Basic parameter bsp

Program prg

User function/function block fun

Imports item from saved item files. The contents from PLC, program is inserted into project. Variable/comment, basic parameter, I/O parameter, etc. is overwritten on the previous item.

TIP

Since Variable/Comment, Basic Parameters and I/O Parameters are overwritten on the existing items; the content of the existing item is deleted.

Page 115: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 117 11/09 Honeywell

Importing a PLC CPU Configuration

To import a PLC CPU configuration, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 In the project window, select the Project Item.

2 On the menu, select Project > Import Item from File > PLC.

3 Select the file, and then click OK.

Importing Variable/Comment

To import Variable/Comment, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 In the project window, select the PLC Item.

Page 116: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

118 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

2 On the menu, select Project > Import Item from File > Global Variables/Address.

3 Select the file, and then click OK.

Page 117: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 119 11/09 Honeywell

Importing I/O Parameter

To import an I/O Parameter, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the project window, select the PLC Item.

2 On the menu, select Project > Import Item from File > I/O Parameter.

3 Select the file, and click OK.

Page 118: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

120 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Importing Basic Parameter

To import basic Parameter, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 In the project window, select the PLC Item.

2 In the menu, select Project > Import Item from File > Basic Parameter.

3 Select the file, and then click OK.

Page 119: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 121 11/09 Honeywell

Importing a Program

To import a Program, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 In the project window, select the Program Location to add. The program can be added to Scan Program or Task Item.

2 On the menu, select Project > Import Item from File > Program.

3 Select the file, and then click OK.

Project properties

To view the project properties, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the project window, select the Project Item.

2 On the menu, select View > Properties.

Page 120: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

122 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Field Label Description

Project name Displays the project name, which can be changed as necessary.

Project description Displays the project description, which can be changed as necessary.

File Name Displays the file name where the project is saved.

To save as a different file:

Select Project > Save As.

3 After the change, click OK.

Page 121: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 123 11/09 Honeywell

Viewing/editing changing PLC Properties

To view the properties of a PLC, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the project window, select the PLC.

2 On the menu, select View > Properties.

3 After the change, click OK.

Viewing/editing task Properties

To view task properties, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the project window, select a Task.

2 On the menu, select View > Properties.

3 After the change, click OK.

Viewing/editing Program information

To view Program properties, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the project window, select a Program.

2 On the menu, select View > Properties.

3 After the change, click OK.

Changing program execution sequence

Scan and Task program is executed from the priority in regular sequence.

Thus, the program location is changed to alter the execution sequence.

Page 122: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

124 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Changing the order of execution

To change the order of execution, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select a program.

2 Right-click on the program and select Move Up (Program) or Move Down (Program) from the context menu.

Changing the execution sequence using Drag and Drop

To change the execution sequence using drag and drop technique, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select a program.

2 Click the mouse to drag to a specific location.

3 Drop on a specific location.

Page 123: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 125 11/09 Honeywell

Comparing Projects

Two projects can be compared with respect to specific items. Compare result is displayed in the Result window.

To compare two projects, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Project > Compare Projects.

2 In the Compare Projects window, click Open Project.

3 Select the project files to compare.

4 Select the items to compare with. The selected items of both projects should be identical.

Page 124: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project Item

126 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

5 Click Compare.

6 Compare results are displayed in the Result window.

Page 125: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.4. Project Password

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 127 11/09 Honeywell

4.4 Project Password

Setting Project password

You can specify the password for a project file. This function prevents other users from opening the project file. This project file password bears no relation with the PLC password. Password can have a maximum of 8 characters

ATTENTION

You will not be able to open the project file if you forget the password.

Input password

To set a password for a project, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the project window, select the Project Items.

2 On the menu, select View > Properties.

Page 126: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.4. Project Password

128 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

3 In the project dialog box, select the Password tab.

4 Enter the password in the Password box in the New password section.

5 Re-enter the password in Confirm password.

6 Click OK.

Page 127: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.4. Project Password

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 129 11/09 Honeywell

Changing password

To change password, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 In the project window, select the Project Item.

2 On the menu, select View > Properties.

3 In the Project dialog box, select the Password tab.

Page 128: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.4. Project Password

130 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

4 Enter the previous password in Password box, under Previous password.

5 Enter the new password in Password box, under New password.

6 Enter the new password once again in Confirm password, identical to the previous password.

7 Click OK.

Page 129: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.4. Project Password

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 131 11/09 Honeywell

Deleting Password

To delete password, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the project window, select the Project.

2 On the menu, select View > Properties.

3 In the Project dialog box, select the Password tab.

Page 130: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

4. Project Configuration 4.4. Project Password

132 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

4 Enter the password in Password box.

5 Click Delete.

Page 131: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 133 11/09 Honeywell

5. Variables

5.1 Overview of variables Use of variables is program dependent. In general, global variable is available in every program. To use a global variable as a local variable, it is necessary to declare it as EXTERN before use. Local variable is available only in a designated program. Direct variable (variables with user specified address) can be used in the program. In addition, a comment can be entered to the direct variable.

5.2 Global/Direct Variable Global/Direct variables consist of global variables, direct variable comments and flags. A Global variable declare the variable to be used for a program or displays a list of the declared variables, based on the available variables. Direct variable comment declares the direct variable comment available in a program or displays the comment. The Flag displays a list of flags provided by the declaration. The following are the different types of flags:

System flag

High Speed link flag

P2P flag

PID flag.

Global Variable

Global variables are declared and the list is displayed.

Page 132: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.2. Global/Direct Variable

134 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Comment of a Direct Variable

It displays the comment of a direct variable entered or declared for the variables.

a) Direct variable: if entering a variable, it displays the data of the direct variable comment.

Page 133: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.2. Global/Direct Variable

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 135 11/09 Honeywell

TIP

Direct variable varies depending on CPU type.

Flag

The following table provides a description of the dialog box.

Field Label Description

Flag kind Used to select the type of flag (System, HS link, P2P and PID)

All Used to display the entire list of flags selected from Flag kind. In case of system flag, all the details are displayed on the screen. If All is not selected, only the flag applicable to the Parameter number and Block index is displayed.

Parameter number

This is active only for High-speed link, P2P and PID flag. Only the flag item of the input parameter number is displayed. (Example, If Parameter Number 1 is entered; the flag number is displayed as in the following figure.)

Page 134: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.2. Global/Direct Variable

136 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Field Label Description

Block index This is active only for High Speed link and P2P flag. Only the flag item of the input block index is displayed. (Example, If Block index 120 is entered; it is as in the following figure.)

Page 135: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 137 11/09 Honeywell

5.3 Global/Direct Variable Edit It is possible to edit the variable kind, variable name, memory address, initial value, retain, used status and comment of a variable currently declared as a global/direct variable. In addition, a new global variable can be added to the list of the global/direct variables.

Global/Direct Variable Registration

Register the global/direct variables to use it in a program. In order to register on the list of global/direct variables, go through Global Variable.

Register as Global Variable

A variable can be added to the list of global variables, modified or deleted from it.

Field Label Description

Variable kind VAR_GLOBAL and VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT are available.

Variable name The declared variable cannot be duplicated.

A number is not allowed as the first character.

A special character is not allowed. (However, ‘_’ is available.)

Space is not allowed as a character.

A direct variable with the same name is not allowed (i.e. MX0, WB0,…)

If a line is empty, BOOL is displayed as the default type when entering

Page 136: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

138 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Field Label Description

a variable.

Type 23 types of variables are available; 20 basic types and 3 derived types.

Basic type(20): (BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING)

Derived type(3): ARRAY(i.e. ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => limit (up to 3rd), STRUCT(i.e. STRUCT name display) => STRUCT type is not available in STRUCT, FB_INST(i.e. FB name display)

Memory address Indicates the memory address that be entered using the direct variable

(I, Q, M, R, W).

Initial value Indicates the default value that can be set.

Retain Indicates if memory address is set, retain column is inactive.

R, W: Always retain area.

M: Setting as per basic parameter information.

I, Q: Always not retain area.

Used Indicates whether to use a declared variable.

Comment Allows entry of a comment. Use Ctrl + Enter key to enter Multi line comments.

Line validity To register on global variable window, it needs variable kind, variable name and variable type.

An incomplete entry in a global variable window is highlighted in pink.

TIP

An error that occurs when editing a cell, is highlighted in pink. Press ESC key to recover the previous value during the cell edit.

Page 137: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 139 11/09 Honeywell

Copy, Cut, Delete and Paste

Copy, cut, delete or paste can be executed to edit the list of global/direct variables used in the program.

Copy

It is used to save the data of a selected area in the clipboard. The copied details can be pasted to the current project or other projects. You can also paste in other applications.

To copy the data to the windows clipboard, perform eth following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the area to copy.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Copy.

TIP

To select the area,

Use the mouse to select the cell of (0,0) in order to select the whole table

Select Edit > Select All in order to select the whole table.

Use the mouse to select the column header of the cell in order to select the whole columns.

Use the mouse to select the row header of the cell in order to select the whole rows.

Use the mouse to drag the part of the cell in order to select the area.

Use Shift + Arrow keys on the keyboard in order to select the area

Delete

It is used to delete the data of a selected area from the list of global/direct variables.

To delete data of a selected area, perform the following steps:

Page 138: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

140 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

1 Select the area to delete.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Delete.

Cut

It is used to save the selected data in the clipboard in order to add to the current project or other projects. Unlike Copy, Cut deletes the selected data from the original area.

To cut the data and save it in windows clipboard, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the area to cut.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Cut.

Paste

This option enables the pasting of cut or copied data (saved on the clipboard) in the selected position. If the data is already displayed, the dialog box is called to select and change the data.

If the data saved in the clipboard is a part of columns,

To paste the data to a specified location:

Step Action

1 Select the position to paste on.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Paste.

3 If the variable and direct variable are identical on the list of variables/comments, the following dialog box is displayed.

Page 139: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 141 11/09 Honeywell

a) Number: used to display the duplicated number of the variables and direct variables to paste

b) Replace: used to apply Paste.

c) Gray Line: used to display the existing list of variables/comments, which is not edited.

d) White Line: used to display the list of variables/comments obtained from the clipboard, which is not edited.

e) OK: applies the lines selected. The existing list of variables/comments is deleted to add a new list of variables/comments.

Page 140: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

142 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

f) Cancel: The existing list of variables/comments is not deleted, and a new the list of variables/ comments is not applied accordingly.

g) Select All: used to select all in the Replace column.

h) Unselect All: used to cancel all the selections in the Replace column.

If the data saved in the clipboard is of the partial column,

To paste the data to a specified location:

Step Action

1 Select the position to paste.

2 On the menu, select Edit >Paste.

3 If the variable and direct variable are identical on the list of variables/comments, the following dialog box is displayed.

Page 141: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 143 11/09 Honeywell

a) Number: Used to display the duplicated number of the variables and direct variables to paste

b) Replace: Used to apply Paste.

c) Gray Line: Used to display the data in the existing cell, which is not edited.

d) White Line: If the variable or address of the data to paste is duplicated, it is automatically increased and then displayed on the screen. In addition, the cell can be edited.

e) Select All: Used to select all in the Replace column.

f) Unselect All: Used to cancel all the selections in the Replace column.

Page 142: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

144 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

TIP

If all items are identical, the cell cannot be edited, while if partially identical, the cell can be edited.

If the number of the columns saved in the clipboard is greater than the number of the columns to paste, it is not possible to paste.

If the data saved in the clipboard is greater than the number of the lines to paste, it is not possible to paste.

Paste in View Direct Variable Comment regards the data saved in the clipboard as the partial columns.

Paste is not available in Flag but in other Excel program.

Changing variable name

To change the variable name, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 In the Project window, double-click Global Variables/Address.

Page 143: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 145 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

The list of all global variables in listed.

2 Click the header of the Serial Number column to select the entire list of variables as illustrated.

3 On the menu, click Edit>Cut or right-click and choose Cut from the menu.

4 Paste the variables into an Excel sheet.

Page 144: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

146 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

5 Make necessary changes to the variable names.

6 Right click on the header of the Serial Number column and choose Paste.

ATTENTION

Do not re-register the special modules.

Insert line

It is used to insert new lines in the selected area. Inserting a line pushes down the existing lines.

To insert new lines, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select a line before which you want to insert a line.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Insert Line.

Page 145: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 147 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

A line is inserted above the selected line.

TIP

If no cell is selected, one line is added to the first line.

Press Enter or Tab to create a new line at the end of the last line.

It is available only in the Global Variable page.

Delete line

It is used to delete the lines in a selected area. To delete existing lines, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select a line.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Delete Line.

Page 146: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

148 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

The line is deleted

ATTENTION

Delete Line is not executed If no cell is selected.

Automatic fill

It is used to add variables to the existing list of variables/comments.

To use automatic fill option, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the mouse to the end of the cell and the mouse cursor changes to + shape.

2 Move the mouse upward and downward, keeping the left mouse button pressed.

Page 147: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 149 11/09 Honeywell

Page 148: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

150 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

a) Variable kind: the value is filled in a cell as copied.

b) Variable Name: it always does Automatic Fill because a duplicate variable cannot be declared. If it contains a number, it automatically increases. If not, it adds a number at the end and counts it automatically.

c) Type: it is filled in a cell as copied.

d) Memory address: it always executes Automatic Fill because address cannot be declared in duplicate. If it contains a number, it searches for the part and increases it automatically.

e) Initial value: it is filled in a cell as copied.

f) Retain: it is checked as copied.

g) Used: it cannot be modified because of Read Only.

h) Comment: If Automatic Fill is done with the Ctrl key pressed, the figure area automatically increases, and with the Ctrl key not pressed, it is copied.

ATTENTION

If Automatic Fill is executed with an empty cell, the contents of subsequent cells are cleared.

This function is available only for variable name and comments.

Page 149: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 151 11/09 Honeywell

Drag & Drop

It is used to drag selected items and paste in a different position. To drag and drop the selected items, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the area to drag and drop.

2 The mouse cursor changes to the state available for drag and drop.

3 Keep the left mouse button pressed and drag and drop the selected items in a position to paste it.

Page 150: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

152 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Drag and drop is available on the Variable Monitoring Window, LD Window, Data Traces window, Global Variable window of other SoftMaster programs and Direct Variable Comment window of other SoftMaster programs.

Copy is available when drag and drop is executed in the Excel program.

Page 151: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 153 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

Data does not move but is copied when dragged and dropped

Paste is not available in Flag.

Undo/Redo

Undo is used to undo or cancel the last edited detail in order to return to its previous state. Click Redo to cancel the Undo action.

Undo/Redo is available in the following cases:

1. Undo/Redo is available for Cell Edit.

2. Undo/Redo is available for Change.

3. Undo/Redo is available for Delete.

4. Undo/Redo is available for Cut.

5. Undo/Redo is available for Paste.

6. Undo/Redo is available for Automatic Fill.

7. Undo/Redo is available for Insert Line. (Only in Global Variable)

8. Undo/Redo is available for Delete Line. (Only in Global Variable)

9. Undo/Redo is available for drag and drop.

10. Undo/Redo is available for Align. (Only in Global Variable)

ATTENTION

In Global Variable, if the data is moved to other windows or a variable is added in LD and IL, all the information for Undo/Redo disappears.

In Direct Variable Comment, if the direct variable item changes, all the information for Undo/Redo disappears.

The Undo/redo function cannot be used in Flag.

Page 152: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

154 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Export to file

It is used to save the previously declared list of global variables in a file that can be subsequently opened and read from external programs.

To export a file, perform the following steps:

On the menu, select Edit > Export to File.

ATTENTION

This function is available only for Global Variables.

Registering Special Module Variables

The Registering Special Module Variables function is used to register variables of the respective module by referring to the special module information specified in I/O parameter. The variable and the comment can be modified.

To register special module variables, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Set the special module on the slot in I/O parameter.

2 Select Global Variables/Address in the project window.

3 Select Global Variable tab in the Global Variable/Address window.

Page 153: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 155 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

4 On the menu, select Edit > Register Special Module Variables.

Page 154: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

156 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

TIP

Registering Special Module Variables removes existing registered entries and re-registers with the newly specified I/O parameters.

Preview

This function is used to view the preview of a screen to be printed.

To see the print preview, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Project > Preview on the window for which you want to preview.

2

Page 155: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 157 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 A preview of the screen to be printed is displayed.

TIP

The size of the columns can be changed to improve readability.

In View Address, all areas of the specified variable type are displayed on the Direct Variable Comment window.

In Global Variable, incomplete variables displayed on the current screen are also displayed on the Preview screen.

Print

It is used to print the window displayed on the screen in Global Variable, Direct Variable Comment and Flag windows.

To print the data, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Project > Print from the screen to print.

2 The project window is printed at the configured printer.

TIP

By changing the size of the column, the details to be printed on paper can be adjusted

In Global Variable, incomplete variables displayed on the current screen are also printed

Other functions

Sort

Double-click the column header to sort the column data in the descending/ ascending sequence.

Current order of data is indicated by the direction of the arrow.

Page 156: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

158 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

It is available only in Global Variable and Flag.

If the Flag mode changes to Global Variable, variables is aligned to display

View

Screen Zoom-In: Displays a magnified view of the screen. Select View > Zoom-In on the menu.

Screen Zoom-Out: Displays a shrunk/reduced view of the screen. Select View > Zoom-Out on the menu.

Use Combo Box for screen Zoom-In/Zoom-Out. Select the magnification rate in

combo box of the toolbar.

Width Automatic Adjust: adjusts the column size applicably to the String length of the cell. Select View > Resize Width on the menu.

Height Automatic Adjust: adjusts the line height applicably to the String height of the cell. Select View > Resize Height on the menu.

Shortcut Keys

Shortcut Keys Comment

Home Used to move to the starting point in the row.

End Used to move to the end of the row.

Ctrl + Home Used to move to the first cell position.

Ctrl + End Used to move to the last cell position.

Shift + Ctrl + Home To select from the current to the previous cells.

Shift + Ctrl + End To select from the current to the last cells.

Shift + Page Up To select from the cell to the page up position.

Shift + Page Down To select from the cell to the page down position.

Shift + Tab,

Shift + Enter

Used to move to the next cell (right->left, bottom->top), and to move to the last cell in the first row.

Page 157: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.3. Global/Direct Variable Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 159 11/09 Honeywell

Shortcut Keys Comment

Tab, Enter Used to move to the next cell (left->right, top->bottom). A new line is created after the last row.

Ctrl + Enter Multi-line is entered in the comment column.

Page 158: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.4. Local Variable

160 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

5.4 Local Variable Local Variable declares the variables used in a program or displays the list of declared variables.

Local Variable

You can declare variables and display the list of declared local variables.

Page 159: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.5. Local Variable Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 161 11/09 Honeywell

5.5 Local Variable Edit On the list of the currently declared local variables, variable kind, variable name, type, memory address, initial value, retain, use or not and comment can be edited. In addition, it adds the local variables used in the program to the list of local variables.

Local Variable Registration

Local variables are automatically registered when all the attributes are filled.

Editing a Local Variable

A variable can be added, modified or deleted to/from the list of local variables.

a) Variable kind: VAR, VAR_CONSTANT and VAR_EXTERNAL, VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT are available.

If variable type is CONSTANT, it sets the initial value as the default (0).

If the variable type is VAR_EXTERNAL or VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT, the columns of the initial value and retain value are displayed as the defaults.

b) Variable name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated within the Local variable.

Page 160: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.5. Local Variable Edit

162 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

The first character cannot be a number.

Special characters are not allowed with the exception of ‘_’.

Space is not allowed as a character.

The name cannot be identical to the name of a direct variable (i.e. MB4, W4, RW9…)

If a line is empty, BOOL is displayed as the default type when entering a variable.

c) Type: 23 types are available; 20 basic types and 3 derived types.

Basic types(20): (BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING)

Derived types(3):

ARRAY(i.e. ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit (up to 3rd), STRUCT(i.e. STRUCT name display) => STRUCT type is no available in STRCT, FB_INST(i.e., FB name display)

d) Memory address: enter it by using direct variable (I, Q, M, R, and W).

e) Initial value: default value can be set.

f) Retain: if memory allocation is set, retain column is inactive.

R, W: Always retain area.

M: Check it by obtaining basic parameter information.

I, Q: Always not retain area.

g) Used: display whether to use a declared variable.

h) Comment: all characters are available.

Multi line entry is available by using Ctrl + Enter key.

i) Line validity: To register on global variable window, it needs Variable kind/Variable Name and type.

A local variable not registered as a global variable, is highlighted in pink.

Page 161: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.5. Local Variable Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 163 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

An error that occurs when editing a cell is highlighted in pink.

Press ESC key to recover the previous value during the cell edit.

Copy, Cut, Delete and Paste

This function for local variables is identical to that for global variables.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL

For information on the Copy, Cut, Delete, Paste, Insert Line, Delete Line, Automatic fill, Drag and Drop, Undo/Redo, and Export to file, refer section on Global/Direct Variable Edit of this document.

Add EXTERNAL Variable

The list created by the Global Variable can be loaded using the Add External Variable function.

To add external variables:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Edit > Add EXTERNAL Variable.

2 The Global Variable Selection dialog box is displayed.

Page 162: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.5. Local Variable Edit

164 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Page 163: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.6. Function Block Variable

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 165 11/09 Honeywell

5.6 Function Block Variable Function Block (FB) variables are a part of user defined function blocks. FB variable stores operation results in a command such as timer and counter. You can go to user defined function blocks in the project tree to add a function block.

FB Variable

You can either declare the variable or view the list of declared FB variables.

Page 164: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.7. FB Variable Edit

166 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

5.7 FB Variable Edit You can edit the variable kind, variable name, type, trigger, memory address, initial value, retain, use or not and comment of the already declared FB variables in the list. In addition, a new FB variable can be added to the list of the FB variables.

FB Variable Registration

FB variables, like eth global variables and local variables must be registered before they can be used in a program.

Registering an FB Variable

A variable can be added to the list of FB variables, modified or deleted from it.

a) Variable kind: VAR, VAR_CONSTANT, VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT, VAR_IN_OUT, VAR_EXTERNAL and VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT are available.

If a variable type is CONSTANT, the initial value is set as the default.

VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT and VAR_IN_OUT cannot set the initial value.

Page 165: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.7. FB Variable Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 167 11/09 Honeywell

b) Variable name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated with the identical name.

A figure is not available for the first character.

Special characters are not available, with the exception of ‘_’.

Space is not available as a character.

A direct variable with the same name is not available (i.e. MB4, W4, RW9,…)

If a line is empty, BOOL is displayed as the default type when entering a variable.

c) Type: 23 types are available; 20 basic types and 3 derived types.

Basic type(20): (BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING)

Derived type(3): ARRAY(�, ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit (up to 3rd), STRUCT(i.e. STRUCT name display) => STRUCT type is not available in STRUCT(i.e. FB name display)

d) Trigger: it is VAR_INPUT or VAR_IN_OUT and active only in BOOL type; it can set R and F status.

e) Memory address: it cannot be declared as Read Only.

f) Initial Value: it can be set.

Initial value cannot be set if the variable type is VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT or VAR_IN_OUT.

g) Retain: it cannot be declared as Read Only.

h) Used: it cannot be declared as Read Only.

i) Comment: every character is available.

Multi line entry is available by using Ctrl + Enter key.

j) Line validity: To register on global variable window, it needs variable type, variable and type.

An FB variable not registered as a global variable is displayed in pink.

Page 166: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.7. FB Variable Edit

168 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

An error that occurs when editing a cell is displayed in pink.

Press ESC key to recover the previous value during the cell edit.

Copy, Cut, Delete and Paste

This function for FB variables is identical to that for global variables and local variables.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL

For information on the Copy, Cut, Delete, Paste, Insert Line, Delete Line, Automatic fill, Drag and Drop, Undo/Redo, and Export to file, refer section on Global/Direct Variable Edit of this document.

Add EXTERNAL Variable

The list created by Global Variable can be loaded by Add External Variable.

To add external variable:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Edit > Add EXTERNAL Variable.

2 The Global Variable Selection dialog box is displayed.

Page 167: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.7. FB Variable Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 169 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Page 168: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.8. FUNCTION Variable

170 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

5.8 FUNCTION Variable Function (FUN) variables are a part of user defined functions. FUN Variables do not store the operation results. You can go to user defined function blocks in the project tree to add a function.

FUN Variable

FUN variable either declares the variable or displays the list of declared FUN variables.

Page 169: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.9. FUN Variable Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 171 11/09 Honeywell

5.9 FUN Variable Edit On the list of the currently declared FUN variables, variable kind, variable name, type, trigger, memory address, initial value, retain, used and comment items can be edited. In addition, a new FUN variable can be added to the list of the FUN variables.

FUN Variable Registration

The FUN variables must be registered before they can be used in a program.

Registering FUN Variable

A variable can be added to the list of FUN variables, modified or deleted from it.

a) Variable Kind: VAR, VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT, VAR_IN_OUT and VAR_RETURN are available.

b) Variable name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated with the identical name.

A figure is not available for the first character.

Special characters with the exception of ‘_’ are not available.

Page 170: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.9. FUN Variable Edit

172 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Space is not available as a character.

The name of the FUN variable must not be same as that of a direct variable.

If a line is empty, BOOL is displayed as the default type when entering a variable.

c) Type: 22 types are available; 20 basic types and 3 derived types.

Basic types(20): (BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING)

Derived types(2): ARRAY(i.e. ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit (up to 3rd), STRUCT(i.e. STRUCT name display) => STRUCT type is no available in STRCT

d) Used: it cannot be declared as Read Only.

e) Comment: every character is available.

Multi line entry is available by using Ctrl + Enter key.

f) Line validity: To register on FB variable window, it needs variable type, variable and type.

- If not registered on FB variable, it displays in pink.

TIP

If any error occurs when editing a cell, it is displayed in pink.

Press ESC key to recover the previous value during the cell edit.

Copy, Cut, Delete and Paste

This function of FUN variables is identical to that for global variables, local variables, and FUN variables.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL

For information on the Copy, Cut, Delete, Paste, Insert Line, Delete Line, Automatic fill, Drag and Drop, Undo/Redo, and Export to file, refer section on Global/Direct Variable Edit of this document.

Page 171: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.9. FUN Variable Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 173 11/09 Honeywell

Export to file

It is used to save the previously declared list of global variables on the file and to open and read in the external programs.

To export a file:

On the menu, select Edit > Export to File.

Page 172: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.10. Editing Variables

174 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

5.10 Editing Variables You can edit the variable, type, memory allocation, initial value, retain and comment from the list of the already declared data types. In addition, it adds the data type used in the program to the list of data types.

Variable Registration

A variable must be registered before it can be used in a program.

Registering a variable

A variable can be added to, modified or deleted from the list of variables.

a) Variable Name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated with the identical name.

A figure is not available for the first character.

Special characters with the exception of ‘_’ are not available.

Space is not available as a character.

A name same with direct variable cannot be used as a name

Page 173: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.10. Editing Variables

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 175 11/09 Honeywell

If a line is empty, BOOL is displayed as the default type when entering a variable.

b) Type: 21 types are available; 20 basic types and 1 derived types

Basic types (20): (BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING)

Derived types(1): ARRAY(i.e. ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit (up to 3 rd)

c) Memory address: Read Only.

d) Initial Value: Read Only.

e) Retain: Read Only.

f) Comment: every character is available.

Multi line entry is available by using Ctrl + Enter key.

TIP

If any error occurs when editing a cell, it is displayed in pink.

Press ESC key to recover the previous value during the cell edit.

Copy, Cut, Delete and Paste Insert Line, Delete Line, Automatic fill, Drag and Drop, Undo/Redo

This function is identical for global variables, local variables, and FB/FUN variables.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL

For information on the Copy, Cut, Delete, Paste, Insert Line, Delete Line, Automatic fill, Drag and Drop, Undo/Redo, and Export to file, refer section on Global/Direct Variable Edit of this document.

Export to file

It is used to save the previously declared list of global variables on the file and to open and read in the external programs.

To export a file:

On the menu, select Edit > Export to File.

Page 174: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.11. User-defined Function/Function Block

176 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

5.11 User-defined Function/Function Block A user can personally create and use a function/function block, which is not provided by SoftMaster. The user-defined function/function block can be created as follows.

Create the user-defined function/function block program

Create the user-defined function/function block I/O variable

User-defined function/function block programming

Compile(register) the user-defined function/function block

Use it in a scan program

Page 175: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.11. User-defined Function/Function Block

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 177 11/09 Honeywell

Creating User-defined Function/Function Block Program

In order to create a user-defined function/function block, select Project > Add Item Function or Project > Add Item > Function Block.

a) Program Name: used to enter a user-defined function/function block. When the user-defined function/function is registered, the input name is registered.

b) Language: used to select a programming language for the user-defined function/function block. A user-defined function is created only by the LD language while a user-defined function block can be created by either the LD or SFC language.

Page 176: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.11. User-defined Function/Function Block

178 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

c) Use EN/ENO: used to select whether to use or not EN/ENO, which is used under the operation condition of function/function block. If not selecting EN/ENO, a user should declare BOOL type variable in the first input and first output parameters of the function/function block.

d) Return Data Type: designates a type of the results after a user-defined function is executed. It is activated only when a user-defined function is created.

e) Program description: used to enter the comment of a user-defined function/function block. If unnecessary, the comment does not have to be entered.

f) OK: saves the entry in the dialog box and closes the dialog box.

g) Cancel: cancels the entry in the dialog box and closes the dialog box.

ATTENTION

Clicking OK creates a new item with the name entered in the item of user-defined function/function block.

Page 177: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.11. User-defined Function/Function Block

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 179 11/09 Honeywell

Creating User-defined Function/Function Block I/O Variable

To create user-defined Function/Function Block I/O variable, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 If double-clicking a local variable among the items created with the name of user-defined function/function block, the following local variable screen is created.

2 Add input variable, I/O variable and output value in the local variable screen. Depending on the added I/O variables, the function/function block type is automatically changed on the bottom of the local variable screen.

Page 178: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.11. User-defined Function/Function Block

180 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

a) VAR_RETURN: A type of variable recurrenting the value of user-defined function. It is automatically created as a variable with the same name of the user-defined function with return type designated when creating a user-defined function.

b) Function type: used to automatically display input variable, I/O variable, function/function block type by output variable in the local variable screen. The type is as same as when using the user-defined function/function block in the scan program.

ATTENTION

There should be at least one or more input and output variables with a maximum limit of 32.

User-defined Function/Function Block Programming

For user-defined Function/Function Block Programming, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 If double-clicking a program among the items created with the newly entered name in the user-defined function/function block, a program screen with the previously designated language appears. The following screen shows the screen created when selecting the LD.

Page 179: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.11. User-defined Function/Function Block

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 181 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

2 Create a program, based on the variable input in the local variable screen.

Page 180: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.11. User-defined Function/Function Block

182 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

If local variable edit and program edit are finished, select function/function block toolbar instruction to check whether the edited user-defined function/function block is registered.

Page 181: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.11. User-defined Function/Function Block

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 183 11/09 Honeywell

Using User-defined Function/Function Blocks

To use user-defined Function/Function Block, perform eth following steps:

Step Action

1 Open the program to use a user-defined Function/Function Block and move the cursor to the position to input.

2 Click Function/Function Block Toolbar.

3 Select a user-defined Function/Function Block in the Function/Function Block dialog box.

Page 182: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.11. User-defined Function/Function Block

184 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

4 Enter the variable to be used in the input/output of function/function block.

Page 183: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.11. User-defined Function/Function Block

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 185 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Page 184: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

5. Variables 5.11. User-defined Function/Function Block

186 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Page 185: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 187 11/09 Honeywell

6. LD Edit

6.1 Overview LD program displays the PLC program through graphic signals of coils or contact points used in the relay logic diagram.

6.2 Limits There are functional limits in LD Program Edit as described in the following table.

Item Description Limit

Maximum contact points Maximum contact points available to add in a line

Up to 31

Maximum lines Maximum lines available to edit

Up to 65535

Maximum Copy lines Maximum Copy lines available to copy at a time

Up to 300

Maximum Paste lines Maximum Paste lines to paste at a time

Up to 300

Page 186: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

188 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

6.3 Program Edit

Edit Tools

The input of LD Edit items is started after the input symbols are selected from the LD tool box and the mouse clicked on the specified position or with applicable Shortcut Key pressed.

Symbol Shortcut key Description

Esc

Changes to selection mode

F3

Normally open contact point

F4

Normally closed contact point

Shift + F1

Positive transition pulse contact point

Shift + F2

Negative transition pulse contact point

F5 Horizontal line

F6 Vertical line

Shift + F8 Connection line

Shift + F9 Reverse input

F9 Coil

F11 Reverse coil

Shift + F3 Set(latch) coil

Page 187: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 189 11/09 Honeywell

Symbol Shortcut key Description

Shift + F4 Reset(unlatch) coil

Shift + F5

Positive transition sensing coil

Shift + F6

Negative transition sensing coil

F10 Function/Function block

Shift + F7 Extended function

Ctrl+3

Normally opened OR contact point

Ctrl+4

Normally closed OR contact point

Ctrl+5

Positive-conversion detection OR contact point

Ctrl+6

Negative-conversion detection OR contact point

The following are the Shortcut Keys related to the movement of the cursor. Applicable Shortcut Keys can be customized by users of SoftMaster.

Shortcut Key Description

Home Moves to the start of the column.

Ctrl+Home Moves to the start of the program

Back space Deletes the current data and moves to the left.

→ Moves the current cursor to the right by a blank.

← Moves the current cursor to the left by a blank.

↑ Moves the current cursor upward by a blank.

↓ Moves the current cursor downward by a blank.

Page 188: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

190 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Shortcut Key Description

End Moves to the end of the column.

Ctrl + End Moves to the last line edited.

TIP

Among Shortcut Keys in Edit Toolbox, ‘s’ stands for Shift key, ‘c’ for Ctrl key. (Example) Positive transition pulse contact point: Shift + F1 → s + F1 → sF1

The Shortcut Keys described in Edit Tool are based on the Shortcut Keys basically provided in SoftMaster.

For setting details on the user defined Shortcut Keys, Refer to 2.4 Shortcut Setting in Chapter 2 Basic Application.

Input Contact point

This is used for adding contact points (normally open contact, normally closed contact, Positive transition pulse contact and Negative transition pulse contact).

To add a contact point, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location to insert the contact point.

2 On the tool box, select the type of the contact to insert and click the edit area. Or click the Shortcut Key applicable to the contact to insert.

3 After the address name is inserted in the Variable Input dialog box, click OK. Refer section on Variable/Address Input for details on the Variable Input dialog box.

Page 189: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 191 11/09 Honeywell

TIP

Select Tool > Options on the menu. Select Common Editor under options. If the Input mode is promptly released from the Edit page, the Variable Input dialog box is not automatically displayed when inserting a contact point and coil.

The basic operation of Enter key is to enter identical instructions used in previous edit.

(Example) If a normally open contact is entered and entered in the previous edit, the normally open contact input dialog box is displayed when the enter key is pressed again.

Input OR contact point

Inputs OR contact point (Normally opened OR contact point, normally closed OR contact point, Positive-conversion detection OR contact point, Negative-conversion detection OR contact point).

To add an OR contact point, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location to insert the OR contact point.

Page 190: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

192 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

2 On the tool box, select the type of the contact to insert and click the edit area. Or click the Shortcut Key applicable to the OR contact to insert.

3 After the address name is inserted in the Variable Input dialog box, click OK. Refer section on Variable/Address Input for details on the Variable Input dialog box.

ATTENTION

In duplicated mode, in case contact point is in cursor, OR connection does not operate.

In application instruction etc, vertical line is not inserted.

Page 191: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 193 11/09 Honeywell

Entering Variable/Address

It is used to enter the Address or Variable/Comment.

Field Label Description

Variable Name Used to enter a variable or declared variable name. If the input String is of variable format and the applicable String is not registered as a variable in the Variable/Comment, the Variable/Comment Add dialog box is displayed.

Local variable Displays the list of declared local variables

Address Comment Displays the address

Page 192: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

194 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Field Label Description

Flag Displays the list of flags. Detailed flag type can be selected on the flag item.

List Displays the list of flags for selection. System/High-speed Link/P2P/PID Flags are available to select.

All Selecting this option displays all the flags for the item. Clearing this selection displays the flags applicable to the input parameter number/block index only.

Parameter number Used to enter the setting number for each selected flag item. 0~12 is available for HS link, 0~8 for P2P and 0~63 for PID.

Block Index Used to enter the block number for each selected flag item. 0~127 is available for High-speed link and 0~63 for P2P.

Global variable Click to display the list of global variables. It can be registered as an EXTERNAL variable.

New Variable Click to add a variable to the list of local variables

Page 193: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 195 11/09 Honeywell

Field Label Description

Edit Variable Click to edit a selected variable.

Delete Variable Click to delete a selected variable from the list of Local Variables

OK Click to save changes and close the dialog box.

Cancel Click to close the dialog box.

Add/Edit Variable Name

Page 194: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

196 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Field Label Description

Variable Name Enter the name of the variable to be added.

Data Type Select a data type for the variable.

Variable Kind Select a variable type.

Address Allocate a direct address for the variable.

Initial value Enter the initial value for the variable.

Trigger Select the trigger state for the variable.

Retain Select to retain the current state of the variable.

Description Enter a description for the variable.

TIP

If the variable name is entered on the Variable/Address dialog box, it is automatically completed based on the currently displayed Variable/Comment list.

Inserting lines

Insert a horizontal line for horizontal connection between LD Edit factors, and a vertical line for vertical connections.

Inserting a horizontal line

To insert a horizontal line, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location to connect.

2 Select the Shortcut Key of Horizontal Line Input. Or select Horizontal Line on the tool box and select the Edit area to insert the Horizontal Line.

Page 195: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 197 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Inserting a vertical line

To add a vertical line, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location to connect.

2 Select the Shortcut Key of Vertical Line Input. Or select Vertical Line on the tool box and select the Edit area to insert the Vertical Line.

TIP

The vertical line is inserted to the left of the current location of the cursor.

Inserting Coil

It is used to insert the coils (coil, reverse coil, Positive transition pulse coil and Negative transition pulse coil).

To insert reverse coil/ Positive transition pulse coil/ Negative transition pulse coil, perform the following steps:

Page 196: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

198 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location where the coil is to be inserted.

2 On the tool box, select the type of coil to insert and then click the edit area. Or click the Shortcut Key applicable to the coil to insert it.

3 After a variable name is entered on the Variable Selection dialog box, click OK.

TIP

If a coil and output related application instruction is entered, a horizontal line is automatically inserted to connect with the left item.

In case there is duplicate coil, output to output module according to status of last coil.

Inserting a function block

Enter a function (block) for operation.

To enter a function (block), perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location where the function (block) is to be entered.

Page 197: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 199 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

2 On the tool box, select the function (block) to enter and then click the edit area. Or click the Shortcut Key applicable to the function (block) input.

Select a function/function block.

a) Name: Select the function (block) to use.

Page 198: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

200 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

b) Search: Used to search for the name of a function(block)

c) List: Select function, function block or function/function block to display the appropriate information.

d) Category: Select a category for the function (block).

e) Function list: displays the list of function(block) of a selected category

f) Function information: displays the information and properties of a function. In case of function, a user can set the properties of an input parameter; in case of function block, a user can select the name and class of an instance.

g) OK: Click to apply the details and close the dialog box.

h) Cancel: Click to close the dialog box.

3 On the Function (block) Input dialog box, enter the function (block), and then click OK.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL

For additional information on the function (block), refer to the 2MLI CPU User’s manual.

Favorite Function Block

It displays a function block that is mostly used in the current project or is recently used. Or, a user can register a function to frequently use in the future.

Viewing function block

To display a function block, perform the following steps:

Page 199: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 201 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

1 On the menu, select View > Instruction Window.

2 Viewing Function block.

A function block is automatically registered when it is used in a LD program. The function block is listed on the top of the list. If a function is already added to the list, the item (function) is displayed on the top.

3

4 If the current list selection is ‘Most Recently Used’, the function is determined by the frequency of function block used.

Page 200: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

202 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

TIP

A function block is automatically registered if the function block is selected on the function block dialog box.

A function copied or pasted does not affect the frequency and the recent use.

Viewing Favorite Function

It enables you to register a function block for frequent use in projects.

To register a function block, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select a Favorite Function in the Selection box.

2 Click Edit to view the list of Functions.

Page 201: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 203 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Favorite Function: displays the currently selected function. The content displayed on the Favorite Function List is the content to be displayed in the Command window.

Function List: displays the list of function blocks available for the current project.

Add: Select a function and click Add to add the selected function to the Favorite Function list.

Remove: Click to delete a selected function from the Favorite Function.

Up: Click to move a selected item to a higher level of the favorite function.

Down: Click to move a selected item to a lower level of the favorite function.

Clear All: Click to clear the current favorite function list.

OK: Click to check and save changes. It also closes the dialog box.

Cancel: Click to close the dialog box.

Page 202: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

204 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Use Function

Uses the function block on the list

To use the function block, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the position to insert a function.

2 Double-click a command to insert in the Command Window.

Page 203: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 205 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

TIP

It is also possible to drag an item to insert in the Command Window and insert it to the LD program.

Entering comments

It is used to insert the Rung and Output Comment. The comment displayed at the start of Rung is called Rung Comment, and the comment for the output factor is called Output Comment.

Adding Rung Comment

To enter a rung comment, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location to enter the rung comment.

Page 204: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

206 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

2 Select Edit > Comment/Label Input.

Enter the Comment and Label.

a) Comment: used to select the Rung Comment to enter.

b) Label: used to select the Label to enter.

c) OK: Click to apply the selected details and close the dialog box.

d) Cancel: Click to close the dialog box.

3 If the Rung Comment dialog box is displayed, enter the comment and click OK.

Enter or edit the Rung Comment or the Output Comment.

Page 205: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 207 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

a) Comment: used to enter the details of the rung comment or the output comment.

b) OK: Click to apply the input details and close the dialog box.

c) Cancel: Click to close the dialog box.

Page 206: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

208 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Output Comment

To enter the output comment, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location to enter the output comment.

2 Double-click or press Enter key.

3 Enter the output comment on the Output Comment dialog box and click OK.

TIP

You can enter an output comment only when an output is available.

Input Label

This is used to enter the label to refer to from the extended function of JMP.

To enter a label on a function, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location to enter the label.

2 Select Edit > Insert Comment/Label.

Page 207: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 209 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 On the dialog box, select Label and press Enter or click OK.

4 On the Label dialog box, enter the label to add, and click OK.

d) Label: Enter the name of the label.

e) Label in: Displays the label currently in use in the same scan program. Selecting an item on the Label in use, the selected item is entered.

Page 208: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

210 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

TIP

A maximum of 16 English characters can be used for the label name.

The first character of the label cannot be an integer or a special character.

Label Input rules are similar to the Variable/Comment Input rules. For additional information on Variable/Comment Input rules, refer to section on Variable/ Comment.

Insert Extension Function

It is used to insert the extension function such as insert/call subroutine and program end.

To insert an extension function, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the position to insert an extension function.

2 Select Edit > Tools > Extension Function.

3 Select an extension function to insert and click OK.

Page 209: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 211 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

a) Extension: Shows an extended function or displays the inserted extended function.

b) Command List: displays the available extended function.

c) OK: Click to apply a selected item and close the dialog box.

d) Cancel: Click to close the dialog box.

TIP

Extension functions, SBRT and RET cannot be inserted at LD used in SFC Action and Transition.

Insert Cell

It is used to insert a new cell at the current cursor position.

To insert a new cell, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location to insert the cell.

Page 210: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

212 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

2 Select Edit > Insert Cell.

TIP

If inserting a cell in Function Block, a variable is also moved together.

Insert Line

It is used to insert a new line at the current cursor position.

To insert a line, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location to insert the line in.

Page 211: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 213 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

2 Select Edit > Insert Line.

TIP

a) If Insert Line is performed, a new line is inserted in the current cursor position.

b) If an area is selected for Line Insert, new lines equal to the lines in the selected area are inserted.

c) If the function block is contained, the line cannot be inserted.

Delete Item

It is used to delete the input contact point, coil, function block, line, rung/output comment and label.

To delete an item, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location to delete the item.

2 Select Edit > Delete.

Page 212: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

214 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Delete Cell

It is used to delete factors such as the input contact point and horizontal line to draw in the next cell.

To delete cell (input contact point and horizontal line), perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location to delete the cell from.

2 Select Edit > Delete Cell.

TIP

Position the cursor on the cell to be deleted and press Delete on the keyboard. Alternately, right-click and select Delete from the context menu.

Page 213: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 215 11/09 Honeywell

Delete Line

It is used to delete all the cells in the selected row.

To delete a line, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor onto the line to delete.

2 Select Edit > Delete Line.

Copy/Cut/Paste

It is used to copy data from a selected area, or cut the data to copy at a specific position. Unlike Copy, the Cut function deletes the data from the selected area.

Copy and paste

To copy the data to windows clipboard:

Step Action

1 Select the area to copy.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Copy.

3 Move the cursor to the area to paste.

Page 214: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

216 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

4 On the menu, select Edit > Paste.

Cut and paste

To cut and paste selected data, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the area to cut.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Cut.

3 Move the cursor to the area to paste on.

Page 215: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 217 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

4 On the menu, select Edit > Paste.

Undo and Redo

It is used to Undo the details edited by Program Edit back to its previous state, or execute the cancelled action again.

Undo (example of Delete)

To undo a particular action, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor onto the position to delete.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Delete.

Page 216: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

218 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

3 On the menu, select Edit > Undo.

Redo (example of Delete)

To redo a particular action:

Select Edit > Redo.

TIP

All the edited details can be cancelled or executed again.

The number of times to cancel the execution is unlimited.

Program Edit Mode

LD Program supports two modes; Insert Mode and Overwrite mode. It is applied when inserting a contact point or function (block).

Insert mode:

Overwrite mode:

Page 217: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 219 11/09 Honeywell

TIP

Use Insert key on the keyboard to toggle between Overwrite and Insert.

If inserting a contact point

Overwrite mode: if entering a different type of contact point, the only contact point type is changed with the input address or variable remained (it does not work if a same type contact point is selected).

Insert mode: always inserts a new contact point to a designated position, regardless of contact point type. Insertion operation is as same as Insert Cell.

If inserting a function (block)

Overwrite mode: inserts a function (block) into the current position.

Page 218: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.3. Program Edit

220 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Insert mode: it inserts a space as high as a function (block) if there is not enough space to insert the function. Insert Space is as same as Insert Line.

Page 219: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.4. Viewing Program Options

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 221 11/09 Honeywell

6.4 Viewing Program Options

View IL Program

It is used to convert the LD program to the IL program and displays with the IL program.

To view an IL program, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select a program.

2 Select View > IL.

ATTENTION

In case of an incomplete rung in the program, the LD program cannot be converted to an IL program.

Edit is not possible in IL View.

Page 220: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.4. Viewing Program Options

222 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Program Magnification Change

This is used for changing the magnification of the LD program displayed on the screen.

Zoom-In

To Zoom-in, select View > Zoom-In on the menu.

Zoom-Out

To Zoom-out, select View > Zoom-Out on the menu.

TIP

Hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard and spin the mouse wheel forward to zoom-in.

Hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard and spin the mouse wheel backward to zoom-out.

On the View Tool selection box, the user can select or directly enter the magnification.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL

For additional information on Tool bars, see section on Tool Bar

View Address

It is used for displaying only the name of the address for the variable or address used as the contact point, coil and function (block). If there is no address, it displays a name of variable.

To view an address:

Select View > Addresses.

Page 221: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.4. Viewing Program Options

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 223 11/09 Honeywell

View Variables

It is used for displaying the name of the variable for the variable or address used as the contact point, coil and function (block).

If no variable is declared for the address, it is displayed as the address name.

To view variables:

Select View > Variables.

View Address/Variables

It is used for displaying the name of the address/variable for the variable or address used in the contact point, coil and function (block).

If there is no address in the variable, the variable name is displayed.

To view address/variable:

Select View > Address/Variables.

Page 222: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.4. Viewing Program Options

224 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

View Address/Comment

It is used for displaying the address/comment for the variable or address used in the contact point, coil and function (block).

If there is no address in the variable, the variable name is displayed.

To view an address/comment:

Select View > Address/Comments.

TIP

If View Options are changed, it may take some time according to the amount of the edited program steps

Print function of the Address/Variable/Comment is available. For the details of print option, refer section on LD Program Print.

View Variables/Comments

It is used for displaying the variable/comment for the device used as the operand of the contact point, coil and application instruction.

To view a variable/comment:

Select View > Variables/Comments.

ATTENTION

If View Options are changed, it may take some time according to the number of the edited program steps.

Print function of the Device/Variable/Comment is available.

Page 223: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.4. Viewing Program Options

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 225 11/09 Honeywell

Adjust No. of Contact Point

It is used to adjust the number of contact points displayed on the screen. Here, the number of contact points is the total number (horizontal cell - 1), excluding the output position.

To adjust the number of contact point:

On the menu, select View > Change Columns > Increase Columns.

If the data on the right of the current screen is larger than the number of contact points to display, it may be displayed by rung including arrow.

Page 224: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.4. Viewing Program Options

226 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

TIP

It may increase or decrease one by one in [View]-[Toolbox]

The number of contact to set is 9 ~ 32.

The number of contact points minimally set in LD program used for SFC action and transition is 5.

LD View Properties

It is used to select the viewing options of the LD Screen. In the screen properties, the options of address, variable and comment view can be set while magnification and the number of contact points can be set simultaneously.

To view LD screen properties, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select View > LD Properties.

2 Change the LD screen properties and click OK.

Page 225: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.4. Viewing Program Options

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 227 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

View Option Indicates the view options for variable and address.

Magnification Indicates the magnification on the screen. It is allowed from 40 to 200%.

No. of contacts Indicates the number of contact points displayed on the screen.

OK Click to apply the settings and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Click to close the dialog box.

Apply Click to apply the settings to the current LD window.

Default Click to set the current settings as the defaults of LD window. If creating a new LD program, it is displayed in the currently set view mode.

Reset Click to restore the current settings to the default.

All Windows Click to apply current settings to all screens.

TIP

In the LD screen properties, Address + Variable + Comment View Options cannot be set.

In case of All Windows, the setting is applied to all of SFC program action, transition and user’s function(block) created by LD.

Page 226: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional Edit Function

228 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

6.5 Additional Edit Function Additional functions for convenient edit are described as follows.

Optimize Program

It is used for deleting the horizontal and empty lines between the contact points so to optimize the position where LD diagram will be drawn.

To optimize the program, perform the following steps.

Select Edit > Optimize Program

Page 227: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional Edit Function

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 229 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

Optimize Program if once executed cannot be back to its previous state through execution cancel.

It may take some time according to the size of the program.

In case LD logic is not complete, optimization function doesn’t operate.

Block Mask Instruction

This is used to specify or cancel the area Block Mask in the PLC among the LD programs.

Block Mask Instruction Setting

To edit the block mask instruction settings, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the rung to specify the Block Mask.

Page 228: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional Edit Function

230 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

2 Select Edit > Set Block Mask.

Canceling Block Mask Instruction

To remove the block mask instruction, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the rung to cancel the Block Mask instruction.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Remove Block Mask.

Page 229: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional Edit Function

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 231 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Bookmark

It enables the user to easily move to a specific area with the bookmark specified on the line.

Set Bookmark

To set a bookmark, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to a line to specify the bookmark on.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Bookmark > Set/Remove.

Page 230: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional Edit Function

232 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Reset Bookmark

To reset a bookmark, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the line to cancel the bookmark from.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Bookmark > Set/Reset.

Page 231: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional Edit Function

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 233 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Reset All Bookmarks

To reset all bookmarks, select Edit > Bookmark > Remove All.

Page 232: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional Edit Function

234 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Previous Bookmark

To edit the previous bookmark, select Edit > Bookmark > Previous Bookmark.

Page 233: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional Edit Function

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 235 11/09 Honeywell

Next Bookmark

To edit the next bookmark, select Edit > Bookmark > Next Bookmark.

Page 234: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional Edit Function

236 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

TIP

Bookmark is specified on the line unit.

Bookmark is not an item to edit, thus the Set/Reset options are not included in Undo and Redo.

Go To

Finding specific line

It is used to move to the specified line position, or go to the position of the edited label and rung comment.

To find a specific line in the program, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Find/Replace > Go To > Step/Line.

Page 235: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional Edit Function

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 237 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

Go to line Used to specify the line to go to

Program list Used to display the list of the current PLC programs

Go to Click to close the dialog box and go to the selected program’s step.

Cancel Click to close the dialog box.

2 Enter the step to move to, on the dialog box.

TIP

It is available only in the LD program.

This function is not available for the LD used for SFC Action/Transitions.

Page 236: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional Edit Function

238 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Finding specific Label

To find a specific label, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Find/Replace > Go To > Label.

2 Select the label to go to on the dialog box.

Field Label Description

Program Displays the list of the current PLC programs. If ‘All Programs’ is selected, the list of all the labels is displayed.

Labels list Displays the list of the labels used in the selected program.

Go To Closes the dialog box to go to the selected label.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

Page 237: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional Edit Function

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 239 11/09 Honeywell

TIP

Go To Label is available only in the LD Program.

This function is not available for the LD used for SFC Action/Transition.

Finding specific Rung Comment

To find a specific comment in a program, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Find/Replace > Go To > Rung Comment.

2 Select the rung comment to go to on the dialog box.

Field Label Description

Program : used to display the list of the current PLC programs. If ‘All Programs’ is selected, the list of all the rung comments is displayed.

Rung comment list : used to display the list of the rung

Page 238: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional Edit Function

240 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

comments used in the selected program.

Go to closes the dialog box to go to the selected rung comment.

Cancel closes the dialog box.

TIP

Go To Rung Comment is available only in the LD Program.

The LD used for SFC Action/Transition is not available in Go To.

Finding END command

To go to the END command, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Find/Replace > Go To > END Command.

2 Select the END command to go to on the dialog box.

Page 239: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional Edit Function

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 241 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

Program Used to display the list of the current PLC programs. If ‘All Programs’ is selected, the list of all the END instructions is displayed.

END instruction list Used to display the list of the END instructions used in the selected program.

Go to Closes the dialog box to go to the selected END instruction.

Close Closes the dialog box.

TIP

Go To END Instruction is available only in the LD Program.

The LD used for SFC Action/Transition is not available in Go To.

Page 240: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7
Page 241: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 243 11/09 Honeywell

7. SFC Edit

7.1 Overview SFC is used for controlling the execution sequence of other programs (LD, ST) by using graphic symbols (step, transition, Branch).

7.2 SFC program limitations SFC program has the following limitations when editing a program.

Item Description Limit

Max. step no. Indicates the maximum number of available steps excluding the step used as step variable in the program.

512 steps

Max. row no. Maximum number of editable rows. 65,535 rows

Max. column no. Maximum number of editable columns. 65,535 columns

Page 242: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

244 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

7.3 Program Edit

Edit Tools

To begin entering the inputs of SFC Edit items, select the input symbols from the LD tool box and click on a specific location or press the associated shortcut key.

Symbol Shortcut Key Description

Esc Changes to selection mode

- Step+Transiton or Transition+Step

- Action

- Block+Transition or transition+block

- Label

- Jump

- Left Branch

- Right Branch

The following Shortcut Keys are related with the movement of the cursor. Applicable Shortcut Keys can be specified by users in the SoftMaster.

Shortcut Key Description

Home Moves to the start of the column.

Ctrl + Home Moves to the start of the program

→ Deletes the current data and moves to the left.

← Moves the current cursor to the right by a blank.

Page 243: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 245 11/09 Honeywell

Shortcut Key Description

↑ Moves the current cursor to the left by a blank.

↓ Moves the current cursor upward by a blank.

End Moves the current cursor downward by a blank.

Ctrl + End Moves to the end of the column.

ATTENTION

Among Shortcut Keys in Edit Toolbox, ‘s’ stands for Shift key, ‘c’ for Ctrl key, ‘a’ for Alt key

The Shortcut Keys described in Edit Tool are based on the Shortcut Keys basically provided in SoftMaster. For more details on the user defined Shortcut Keys, Refer to 3.4 Shortcut Key Settings in Chapter 3 Basic Application.

For each SFC program added to the project program list, at least 64 words of automatic variables must have been declared.

Input step/transition

This is used to insert a Step/Transition in a program.

To insert a Step/Transition, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location you want edit.

2 Select symbol on the tool box and click the edit area. Or press shortcut key applicable to symbol.

3 A new Step/Transition is inserted.

Page 244: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

246 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

ATTENTION

Step name is allocated automatically; it can however be edited.

According to input location, Step + Transition or Transition + Step are inserted.

Item of location selected

Step + Transition

Transition, start line of parallel branch, label, selection branch termination line

Transition + Step

Step, Block, start line of selection branch, parallel branch termination line

Read Only variables cannot be used for Step/Transition variable.

Page 245: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 247 11/09 Honeywell

Input Action

Action is executed when step is activated. Executes the program connected with action.

To edit the symbol in a program, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location you want to edit

2 Select symbol on the tool box and click the edit area. Or press shortcut key applicable to symbol.

Or

or

Page 246: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

248 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

Action’s location is different according to selected edit area.

Location item

Right Action’s location is the right of step when selecting step

Bottom Action’s location is the bottom of action when selecting action

The no. of step connected with one step is not limited.

Action cannot be connected with block.

Input Block/Transition

Inputs Block/Transition.

To insert a Block/Transaction, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the block you want edit.

2 Select a block on the tool box and click the edit area or click the shortcut key applicable to symbol.

3 New block/Transition is inserted.

Page 247: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 249 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

ATTENTION

Block input location standard is same as step input.

Input label

Inputs label.

To ass a label, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location you want edit.

2 On the tool box, select the label to enter and then click the edit area. Or click the Shortcut Key applicable to symbol.

3 The new label is inserted.

Page 248: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

250 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

ATTENTION

Label can be inserted when selecting step or block.

Label is inserted ahead of the selected step or block.

Input Jump

To insert a jump in a program, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location you want to edit

2 On the tool box, select the Jump to insert and then click the edit area. Or click the Shortcut Key applicable to symbol.

3 A new jump is inserted.

Page 249: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 251 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

ATTENTION

The jump can be inserted when selecting the last transition within selection branch or transition of program in the last row.

The jump is inserted ahead of the selected transition.

The Jump is available within the same program.

Create left branch

Create left branch. Example is the selection branch.

Make branch

To make a branch perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location to start branch.

Page 250: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

252 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

2 On the tool box, select the left branch and click the edit area or press shortcut key.

3 It displays branch start location and branch connection location.

4 Move cursor to the branch end location.

5 Select the branch end location.

Branch start location

Branch termination location

Page 251: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 253 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

6 The branch is created.

ATTENTION

When selecting the branch start location, the selection branch or parallel branch is created according to the branch start location.

Item of branch start location

Line shape

Selection branch Step, block Horizontal one line

Parallel branch Transition Horizontal two line

Extending branch

To extend a branch, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the branch to extend.

Page 252: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

254 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

2 On the tool box, select the left branch and click the edit area or press appropriate shortcut key.

3 A new branch is created.

ATTENTION

The maximum number of branches is limited to the number of rows.

Create right branch

Creating a right branch. Example is parallel branch.

Make branch

To make a branch at a location, perform the following steps:

Page 253: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 255 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location to start the branch.

2 On the tool box, select the right branch and click the edit area. Or press shortcut key.

3 It displays the branch start location and the branch connection location.

4 Move the cursor to the branch termination location.

Branch start location

Branch termination location

Page 254: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

256 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

5 Select the branch end location.

6 The branch is created.

ATTENTION

The procedure to create a parallel branch is same as creating a left branch. Refer section on ‘create left branch’.

Page 255: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 257 11/09 Honeywell

Extending branch

To extend a branch of a location, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location to extend the branch.

2 On the tool box, select the right branch and click the edit area. Or press shortcut key.

3 New branch is inserted.

Page 256: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

258 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Edit Step Property

Edit step name, comment etc.

To edit Step property of a location, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location you want to edit.

2 Press Enter key or double-click the mouse.

Field Label Description

Name Enter the name of the step.

Comment Enter a comment for the step.

Initial step Designates it as initial step.

Step variable Refers to step name from local variable list.

Find To find a variable from the local variable list.

OK Click to save the contents and close window

Cancel Click to close window without saving.

Page 257: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 259 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

The initial step is execution start step of program. You can designate only one. When checking the program, it checks the error.

When using step variable, you can refer it from other programs.

Transition property

Edit the transition’s name, comment.

To edit the transition property of a location, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location you want edit.

2 Press Enter key or double-click the mouse.

Page 258: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

260 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Field Label Description

Name Enter transition’s name.

Comment Enter the transition’s comment.

Type Select transition as variable or program.

List Displays the other transition used in the current program.

Find You can select variable from local variable list.

Less Hides the list.

OK Saves the contents and closes window.

Cancel Closes window.

ATTENTION

Transition program can be written by LD program.

Action property

Edit the action’s name, comment, and qualifier.

To edit the Action property of a location, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location you want edit.

2 Press Enter key or double-click the mouse.

Page 259: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 261 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

Name Enter the name of the action.

Comment Enter a comment for the action.

Type Designates action as variable or program.

Post scan Deactivates the coil in the action after executing the action.

List Displays the other actions used in the current program.

Qualifier Acts differently according to action qualifier.

Time Enters time according to qualifier.

Find You can select variable from local variable list.

Page 260: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

262 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Less Hides the list.

OK Saves the contents and close window.

Cancel Closes window.

Page 261: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 263 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

Action can operate differently according to the action qualifier.

Qualifier

.

Functions Action characteristic

N (Non-stored)

Action is executed when step is activated.

R (overriding Reset)

When the step is activated, the action whose qualifier is S, SD, DS, and SL stops.

S (Set) If the step is activated, it continues its execution unit R qualifier is executed.

L (time Limited)

If the step is activated, it continues its execution when the time is being set.

D (time Delayed)

If the step is activated, the action starts after setting the time.

P (Pulse) If the step is activated, it continues its execution during one scan.

SD (Stored & time Delay)

If the step is activated, action starts after setting time and it continues its execution unit until R qualifier is executed. If R qualifier is executed before setting time, action is not executed.

DS (time Delayed & Stored)

If step is activated, action starts after setting time and it continues its execution unit until R qualifier is executed. If R qualifier is executed before setting time or step is deactivated, action is not executed.

SL (Stored & time Limited)

It continues its execution when the time is being set or unit R qualifier is executed.

activated status step

Action operating

R qualifier is executed

Setting time

1 scan execution

R

R

R

R

Page 262: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

264 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

You can insert a time expression such as “T#1h2m3s” “T#2m” “T#15s”.

Action program can be written by LD ST or SFC.

Edit Block Property

Edit block’s property - name, comment and other details.

To edit the Block property of a location, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location you want to edit.

2 Press Enter key or double-click the block.

Page 263: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 265 11/09 Honeywell

a) Name: inserts the block’s name.

b) Comment: inserts block’s comment.

c) List: displays other block used in the current program.

d) Less: hides list.

e) OK: saves the contents and closes window

f) Cancel: closes the window.

ATTENTION

Block can be written by only SFC program.

Action cannot be connected with block.

Page 264: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

266 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Edit label property

Edit label’s name.

To edit Label property of a block, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the block you want to edit.

2 Press Enter key or double-click the block.

a) Label: inserts the label.

b) List: displays the name of other labels used in the current program.

Page 265: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 267 11/09 Honeywell

c) OK: saves the contents and closes window.

d) Cancel: closes the dialog box.

Jump property

Edit jump’s name.

To edit Jump property of a program, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location you want to edit.

2 Press Enter key or double-click a block.

Page 266: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

268 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

a) Jump: inserts a jump’s name.

b) List: displays other label used in the current program.

c) OK: saves the contents and closes window.

d) Cancel: closes the dialog box.

ATTENTION

Ensure that the name of the Jump is the same as label name.

Jump to other SFC program is not available.

Set Branch Priority

You can set branch priority.

To set branch priority, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the select branch’s start location.

Page 267: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 269 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

2 On the menu, select Edit > Set Branch Priority.

3 Click the select branch’s start location in order to set branch priority.

4 To complete the editing, click outside the selection branch.

ATTENTION

You can set selection branch priority equal to the branch number.

When not setting branch priority, compilation is initiated from let to right. Program is executed from left to right.

Page 268: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

270 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Erase Branch Priority

Erase branch priority.

To erase branch priority, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the branch that has priority.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Erase Branch Priority.

3 Branch priority is erased.

Delete item

A step, transition, action, block, label, jump, and branch of a program can be deleted.

To delete an existing item, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location where the item you want to delete exists.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Delete.

Page 269: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 271 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

The transition and blocks can be deleted by performing the above step.

Sometimes deleting is not available. In this case, editing is canceled automatically after warning message.

Deleting a branch deletes all items under the branch.

Copy/Cut/Paste

To Copy and paste data perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the block/function you want to copy.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Copy.

3 Copied area is displayed.

4 Move the cursor to the location you want to paste.

Page 270: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

272 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

5 Select menu Edit > Paste.

ATTENTION

The item under step, transition and block can be copied with step, transition and block according to selected location.

Sometimes pasting is not available according to the location to paste. At this time, editing is canceled automatically.

When copying the branch start point, the item under branch is copied with branch start point.

When pasting the branch, select the branch start point.

The selection branch can be pasted into the selection branch and the parallel branch can be pasted into the parallel branch.

When pasting into the action, select the step you want to paste.

Principal to paste is same with item input.

Page 271: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 273 11/09 Honeywell

Cut/Paste

To Cut and Paste data, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the location to cut.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Cut.

3 Move the cursor to the location to paste.

4 On the menu, select Edit > paste.

Page 272: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

274 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Undo and Redo

SoftMaster provides the standard undo and redo options.

Undo (example)

To undo an action, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Place the cursor to the location you want to delete.

Page 273: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 275 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

2 On the menu, select Edit > Delete.

3 On the menu, select Edit > Undo.

4 Editing is cancelled.

Page 274: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program Edit

276 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Redo (Example)

To redo an action perform the following steps:

Select Edit > Redo on the menu.

ATTENTION

Undo and Redo for all items.

Unlimited number of undo is available.

Program Edit Mode

SFC program supports only insert mode.

Insert mode:

Page 275: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.4. View Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 277 11/09 Honeywell

7.4 View Program You can zoom in or out on a program.

Program zoom In/Out

Zoom In

To Zoom In on a program, perform the following steps:

On the menu, select View > Zoom In.

Zoom Out

To Zoom Out on a program, perform the following steps:

On the menu, select View > Zoom Out.

ATTENTION

Ctrl + Upward Wheel if available enable Zoom-Out step by step.

Ctrl + Downward Wheel if achieves perform Zoom-In step by step.

On the View Tool selection box, the user can select or directly enter the level of magnification. Refer to section on Tool Box for additional details.

SFC Property

It enables you to edit SFC property.

To edit SFC property, perform the following steps:

Select menu Tools > Options > SFC.

Page 276: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.4. View Program

278 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

a) Show comment: displays the comment of step, transition, action and block.

b) Show print area: displays the printing area with thick dotted line.

c) Show page number: displays page no. printed in the print area.

d) Step column width: sets width of vertical column of step, transition location.

e) Action column width: displays width of vertical column of action location.

f) Utilize SFC split window: You can use SFC split window

g) Split window position: You may decide in which direction the window gets divided.

h) Split window contents: You may decide which contents the program displays in the split window.

ATTENTION

The range of the Step column is 20~200.

The range of the Action column is 70~400.

Page 277: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.4. View Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 279 11/09 Honeywell

Show comment

<Not Showing comment> <Showing comment>

Show print area

Show page number

Page 278: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.4. View Program

280 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step column width

<Step column 68 pixel (basic) screen> <Step column 100 pixel screen>

Action column width

<Action column100 pixel (basic) screen> <Action column 150 pixel screen>

Page 279: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.4. View Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 281 11/09 Honeywell

Utilize SFC split window

<With split window>

<Without split window>

Page 280: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.4. View Program

282 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Split window contents

<Viewing the selected action, transition: when selecting action>

<Viewing the identical SFC program>

Page 281: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.4. View Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 283 11/09 Honeywell

<Viewing the fix split window contents: displays the previous screen>

Split window position

<Right>

Page 282: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.4. View Program

284 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

<Bottom>

View Block/Action/Transition List

You can check other programs list used in the SFC program and edit the name and comment.

To view Block/Action/Transition List, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select View > Block/Action/Transition List.

2 Displays list.

Page 283: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.4. View Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 285 11/09 Honeywell

Open Action/Transition

In the SFC program, open the selected action, transition with the new window.

To open Action/Transition, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location you want to open program.

2 On the menu, select View > Open Action/Transition.

3 Open the selected program in a new window.

Address/Variables

Displays variables or address used in the contact, coil, function (block) as Address/Variables name. If variable does not have an address, it displays the variable name.

To view Address/Variables, perform the following steps:

On the menu, select View > Address/Variables.

Page 284: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.4. View Program

286 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Address/Comments

Displays variables or addresses used in the contact, coil, function (block) as Address/Comment. If the variable does not have an address, it displays the name of the variable.

To view Address/Comments, perform the following steps:

On the menu, select menu View > Address/Comments.

ATTENTION

Modifying the settings may result in increased viewing time based on the program size.

When printing, Address/Variables/Comments is supported. For additional information, refer to section on Printing.

Adjust Contact No.

It is used to adjust the number of contact points displayed on the screen. Here, the number of contact points is equal to the total number (horizontal cell - 1), excluding the output position.

To adjust the number of contact points, perform the following steps:

On the menu, select View > Change columns > contact no.

If the data to the right of the current screen is larger than the number of contact points to display, it may be displayed by rung including arrow.

Page 285: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.4. View Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 287 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

It may increase or decrease one by one in View > Toolbox.

The number of contact to set is 9 ~ 31.

The number of contact points minimally set in LD program used for SFC action and transition is 5.

Page 286: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.5. Edit additional Function

288 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

7.5 Edit additional Function SoftMaster provides an Edit additional function for convenience of edit.

Bookmark setting

To set a bookmark, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location you want to set bookmark.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Bookmark > Set/Remove.

Page 287: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.5. Edit additional Function

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 289 11/09 Honeywell

Remove Bookmark

To remove an existing bookmark, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the location you want to remove bookmark.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Bookmark > Set/Remove.

Remove all bookmarks

To remove all bookmarks, perform the following steps:

Select Edit > Bookmark > Remove all.

Page 288: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.5. Edit additional Function

290 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Previous Bookmark

To remove previous bookmark, perform the following steps:

Select Edit > Bookmark > Previous Bookmark.

Next Bookmark

To remove next bookmark, perform the following steps:

Select Edit > Bookmark > Next Bookmark.

Page 289: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.5. Edit additional Function

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 291 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

Bookmark is specified in cell unit.

Bookmark is not an item to edit, thus the Set/Reset options is not be included in Undo and Redo.

Go To

You can go to designated line, edited label, rung comment.

Go to Step/Line

To use go to step/line command, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Find/Replace > Go To > Step/Line.

2 Select the step you want to move to, in the dialog box.

Page 290: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.5. Edit additional Function

292 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Field Label Description

Go to line Enter the line number you want to go.

Program list Displays the list of PLC programs.

Go to Closes dialog box and goes to selected step.

Close Closes dialog box.

ATTENTION

Go To Line is available in the LD program.

It does not operate in the LD used in the SFC Action/Transition.

Page 291: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.5. Edit additional Function

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 293 11/09 Honeywell

Go To Label

To use go to Label command, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Find/Replace > Go To > Label.

2 Select label you want to go to in the dialog box.

Field Label Description

Program Displays current list of PLC programs. If you select ‘All program’, it displays the list of all labels.

Label list Displays the list of labels used in the selected program.

Go to Closes dialog box and goes to selected label.

Close Closes dialog box without save.

ATTENTION

Go To Label operates in the LD program.

It does not operate about LD used in the SFC program’s Action/Transition.

Page 292: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.5. Edit additional Function

294 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Go To rung comment

To use go to rung command, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Find/Replace > Go To > Rung comment.

2 Select the rung comment you want to go.

Field Label Description

Program Displays current PLC program list. If you select ‘All program’, it displays list of all rung comment.

Label list Displays list of rung comment used in the selected program.

Go to Closes dialog box and goes to selected rung comment.

Close Closes dialog box without save.

Page 293: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.5. Edit additional Function

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 295 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

Go To Rung Comment is available in the LD program.

It does not operate about LD used in the SFC program’s Action/Transition.

Go To END Command

To use go to end command, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Find/Replace > Go To > END Command.

2 Select the END command you want to go.

Field Label Description

Program Displays current PLC program list. If you select ‘All program’, it displays list of all END command.

Label list Displays the list of END command used in the selected program.

Go to Closes dialog box and goes to selected END comment.

Close Closes the dialog box without saving.

Page 294: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.5. Edit additional Function

296 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

Go To END command is available in the LD program.

It does not operate about LD used in the SFC program’s Action/Transition.

Page 295: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

7. SFC Edit 7.5. Edit additional Function

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 297 11/09 Honeywell

Page 296: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7
Page 297: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 299 11/09 Honeywell

8. Programming

8.1 Cross Reference It is used to display the application details of all the Addresses and variables used in a program. It includes contact points (normally open contact point, normally closed contact Points, Positive transition pulse contact point and Negative transition pulse contact point), coils (coil, reverse coil, Positive transition pulse coil and Negative transition pulse coil), I/O parameter of function(block) and all the addresses and variables used as the operand of extended functions.

View All Addresses

It is used to display all the addresses used in the current PLC.

To view all the addresses in a PLC, on the menu, select View > Cross Reference.

Column Details

Address Displays the names of all the addresses used in the current PLC

Variable Name

Displays the names of all variables used in the current PLC.

PLC Displays names of PLC belonging to the current program

Program Displays the name of the program using the applicable address.

Page 298: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.1. Cross Reference

300 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Column Details

Position Displays the coordinates inside the program.

Comment Displays the comment of address and variables.

Information

The following signs are displayed for the type of instructions;

-( )-: Coil

-(/)-: Reverse coil

-(S)-: Set coil

-(R)-: Reset coil

-(P)-: Positive transition pulse coil

-(N)-: Negative transition pulse coil

-| |-: Normally open contact point

-|/|-: Normally closed contact point

-|P|-: Positive transition pulse contact point

-|N|-: Negative transition pulse contact point

-[F]-: Extended function parameter

-VAR-: Function(block) I/O parameter

Data Sorting

Click the column header to sort the applicable column. Whenever the column is clicked, it is sorted in the ascending and then descending sequence repeatedly. A triangle is displayed on the basic column of the current alignment. The normal triangle indicates that the data is sorted in the ascending sequence, and a reverse triangle indicates that the data is sorted in the descending sequence.

Example.1) Alignment in the ascending sequence based on the address names

Example.2) Alignment in the descending sequence based on the address names

Page 299: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.1. Cross Reference

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 301 11/09 Honeywell

Go To

It is used to go to the position of the program using the selected address. Double-click the applicable line, or right-click to select Go To on the menu.

Select Row

It is used to display the specific data only on the screen. Right-click and select each item from the Select Row menu.

Lock Data

Details of the Cross Reference Window are updated when the cursor moves in the program. If you don’t want to update them, specify the Fix function. Right-click and select Lock Data.

Delete Data

It deletes all the details of the Cross Reference Window.

Page 300: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.1. Cross Reference

302 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Output Cross Reference Instantly

If an address or variable is selected in the program, the used position and the application are displayed.

To view the output cross-reference instantly, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the Cross Reference tab to display the Cross Reference Result.

2 Move the cursor to the position of the address to display its purpose.

Page 301: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.1. Cross Reference

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 303 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

If ‘Output cross reference instantly’ is used, the edit speed is likely to slow down.

Select Tools > Options > Edit Ladder/Mnemonic, on the Edit page to apply ‘Output cross reference instantly’ function.

Check Duplicate Coil Instantly

This function is used to check the applicable address or variable if used as duplicate whenever the coil is edited. If the address is used as a coil in a different location inside the PLC, the list for the program name, location and step is displayed.

To check a duplicated coil instantly, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Add a coil.

Page 302: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.1. Cross Reference

304 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

2 Select and copy the line where the applicable coil is included. Move to the next line and paste.

Page 303: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.1. Cross Reference

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 305 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

If check duplicated coil instantly is used, the edit speed may be slow.

Select Tools > Options > Edit Ladder/Mnemonic, on the Edit page to apply Check duplicated coil instantly function.

Check duplicated coil instantly checks the coil and the reverse coil, Positive transition pulse coil and Negative transition pulse coil only.

Page 304: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.2. Used Address

306 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

8.2 Used Address It shows all the addresses and the number used in the program (LD, SFC). The addresses used in each address area according to the designated types are displayed as classified into input and output.

a) Address Display: displays each address used in the program.

b) Word Column: used to display the number of the applicable address types used in the program. The column displays the number in accordance with the address type designated when executing the address used.

c) Bit Column: used to display the number of applicable bit addresses used in the program. The addresses of S area, T area and C area are displayed. The column displays the addresses of the types smaller than those designated when executing the used address in bit type. Therefore, if designating word type, it displays the bit only. If the column designates 16 data types, 8 columns are created.

d) I/O classification: used to display the number of applicable bit addresses as classified into input (I) and output (O).

e) It displays there is 1 address using the 5th bit of %MW1 as the output.

f) It displays there is 1 address using %MW2 as the input.

Viewing Used Address

To view a used address:

Step Action

1 Select View > Used Address.

2 Select a desirable Address on the Used Address selection dialog box.

Page 305: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.2. Used Address

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 307 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

Address Area Selection Selects an address area. The available areas are All

Address Type Selection

Selects an address type. Bit

ATTENTION

Select Update Used Address on the context menu to display the used addresses

Editing the program after Used Address is executed, does not update the content of the Used Address automatically. If you want to see the Used Address of edited program, select Update Used Address again.

Page 306: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.2. Used Address

308 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

View Address Uses

Double-click the cell where the used I/O figures are displayed, or click View Address Uses on the context menu.

Field Label Description

PLC Used to display the PLC name with the applicable Address used.

Address used It is the Address that the View Address Uses dialog box shows.

Program Displays the program name with the applicable Address used

Address Displays the address used in the program.

Page 307: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.2. Used Address

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 309 11/09 Honeywell

Field Label Description

Type Displays the address type used in the program.

IN/OUT Displays whether the address is used as Input or Output.

Instruction Displays the instruction type of operand for which the applicable address is used. (Displayed as identical as the instruction tool bar of LD editor).

Position Displays the position in the program.

Comment Displays the comment of a selected address.

Go To The function going to the program using the address of a selected line.

Page 308: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

310 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

8.3 Check Program This function is used to check the prepared LD program for errors. The following items are checked.

Logic Error: checks for LD connection errors.

Grammar Error: checks for grammatical errors used in SBRT/CALL, FOR/NEXT, etc.

Duplicated Coil Error: checks for errors if duplicate output items are used.

Check Program Setting

To check a program setting:

Step Action

1 Select View > Check Program.

Field Label Description

Page 309: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 311 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Logic Error Used to check for program’s logic errors such as LD connection errors and short circuit.

Grammar Error Used to check for errors in the application instructions such as CALL/SBRT, MCS/MCSCLR, etc.

Unreferenced label Used to specify the processing range of the declared label which was not used. Ignore, Warning or Error can be selected.

Unreferenced subroutine

Used to specify the processing range of the declared subroutine which was not used. Ignore, Warning or Error can be selected.

Duplicated coil error Used to check for the Duplicated Coil error.

Strict check on data type

Used to select Error or Warning for the Duplicated Coil.

Check program size Displays program size when checking.

Report unused variables

Displays unused variables when checking.

Current program (modbus)

Used to check the current program only.

All programs Used to check all the programs listed on the current PLC item.

ATTENTION

Ignore: used to ignore errors.

Warning: If any error occurs, a Warning is displayed on the Result Window and writing a program on PLC is available.

Error: If any error occurs, Error is displayed on the Result Window and writing a program on PLC is unavailable.

ATTENTION

For additional details on Logic Error and Grammar Error, see sections on Logic Error and Grammar Error.

Page 310: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

312 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

If the current program only is selected while one or more programs are listed on the current PLC item, CALL/SBRT is not checked.

When writing a program on the PLC, all the items except the Duplicated Coil are always checked even if it is not specified by the user.

In the 2MLI series of PLC, many programs can be added to the PLC item and the SBRT call is available between programs.

Field Label Description

Checking Address Sets the address and variable area to check.

Page 311: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 313 11/09 Honeywell

Specification

Checking Option Designates whether to check duplicated coil for a function (block) output.

OK Applies the setting and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

ATTENTION

Set coil (-(S)-) and Reset coil (-(R)-) are not checked for Duplicate Coil.

In the Function (block) output check, the range is determined by the parameter type.

Page 312: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

314 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Check Result Trace

If any error occurs on the program, its details are displayed on the Program Inspect tab of the message window. Double-click the error details to move to the location where the error occurs.

Page 313: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 315 11/09 Honeywell

Logic Error

It is used to check for any logic error, and display its details and location.

1. L0000: Input or output is not connected. This error occurs if the contact point is not connected with the power line.

Action: Correct the LD program to prevent an input-output disconnect.

2. L0100: It is a short circuit. This error occurs if the area connected with the OR is connected with the horizontal line without the contact point.

Action: Delete OR if the OR connection is not necessary any more, or enter the contact point in the applicable location.

3. L0200: Address or variable is not input. This error occurs if the address or variable is not input in the contact point or coil.

Action: Input a proper address in the contact point or coil where the error occurs.

Page 314: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

316 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

4. L0300: OR-LOAD incorrectly connected. This error occurs if OR-LOAD connected incorrectly.

Action: Search for OR-LOAD incorrectly connected and then correct the LD program.

5. L0400: Specified number of contact points is exceeded. This error occurs if the number of continuous LOAD instructions exceeds 32.

Page 315: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 317 11/09 Honeywell

Action: Correct the LD program to limit the LOAD instructions within 32.

6. L0401: Incorrect input. This error occurs if the input necessary is nonexistent.

Action: Add the necessary input to the input terminal.

7. L0402: Incorrect input. This error occurs if the input unnecessary is existent.

Action: Delete the input unnecessary from the input terminal.

Page 316: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

318 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

8. L0404: The maximum number of MPUSH exceeded. This error occurs if the number of continuous MPUSH/MPOP exceeds 16.

Action: Correct the LD program to limit the continuous MPUSH/MPOP to 16.

9. L0406: Application instruction in error. This error occurs if the application instruction is not existent in the 2MLI series PLC is used.

Page 317: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 319 11/09 Honeywell

Action: Replace the instruction with the one provided by the 2MLI series of PLC.

ATTENTION

This error occurs if GMWIN series PLC project file is converted to 2MLI project.

Page 318: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

320 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Grammar Error

This function is used to check for grammar-related errors generated when an application instruction is used.

1. E1001: Label declared as duplicated. This error occurs if duplicated LABEL used.

Action: Delete the duplicated label, or change the name of the label.

E1002: Label ‘Label Name‘nonexistent. This error occurs if JMP is used to refer to the nonexistent label.

Action: Add the label where the error occurs, or correct the JMP instruction which uses the label.

E1003: Label ‘Label Name’ not used. This error occurs if the JMP instruction is not used in the program.

Action: Delete the label, or add the application JMP instruction.

Page 319: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 321 11/09 Honeywell

E1004: Label ‘Label Name’ not used in the subroutine. This error occurs if the JMP instruction is not used in the program.

Action: Delete the label in the subroutine, or add the application JMP instruction.

ATTENTION

The error number E1003/E1004 occurs only when Warning or Error is selected for the label not referred to in the ‘Grammar Error’ not selected in the View > Check Program option. For additional information, see section on Check Program.

Page 320: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

322 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

E1005: Label ‘Label Name’ nonexistent in the subroutine. This error occurs if the JMP instruction uses the label nonexistent in the subroutine.

Action: Add the label in the subroutine, or correct the JMP instruction.

E2001: Return instruction nonexistent in the subroutine ‘Subroutine Name. The subroutine is finished with the RET instruction.

Action: Add the RET instruction in the subroutine block.

Page 321: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 323 11/09 Honeywell

E2010: Subroutine call nonexistent. The call of nonexistent SBRT causes an error.

Action: Add the SBRT~RET blocks of the subroutine name to call.

E2003: Subroutine 'Subroutine Name' is positioned prior to END instruction. SBRT and RET positioned prior to END instruction cause an error.

Page 322: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

324 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Action: Move the application instructions SBRT and RET to the position after the End instruction.

E2011: Subroutine not used. Although SBRT~RET blocks exist, no CALL instruction is available to use the applicable subroutine.

Action: Delete the subroutine not being used, or add the CALL instruction.

Page 323: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 325 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

The error number E2011 occurs only when Warning or Error is selected for the subroutine not referred to in the Grammar Error Inspect item. For additional information, see section on Check Program.

E2012: Subroutine declared as duplicated. ‘Subroutine Name’- An identical name of the subroutine cannot be used.

Action: Change the duplicated name of the subroutine.

E2014: The maximum number of subroutines exceeded. Based on the PLC type, the maximum number of subroutines is exceeded.

Action: Check the number of the subroutines used.

Page 324: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

326 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

The maximum number of subroutines usable depends on the PLC type. Refer to 2MLI CPU manual for details.

E3001: Equal number of NEXT unavailable. If the number FOR/NEXT instructions are not equal, it causes this error.

Action: Let the number of FOR instructions and NEXT instructions be the same.

E3002: Equal number of FOR unavailable. If the number FOR/NEXT instructions are not equal, it causes this error.

Action: Let the number of FOR instructions and NEXT instructions identical.

Page 325: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 327 11/09 Honeywell

E3003: FOR-NEXT cannot be nested more than 16 times. FOR/NEXT can be duplicated up to 16 blocks. If the number of the duplicated FOR/NEXT blocks exceeds 16, it causes an error.

Action: Limit the number of the FOR / NEXT blocks not to exceed 16.

E3004: Between FOR-NEXT, RET or END is not available. If RET or END is included between FOR and NEXT, it causes an error.

Page 326: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

328 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Action: Change the location of the END and RET instruction positioned between FOR/NEXT blocks.

E3005: BREAK singly used. BREAK instruction can be used only between FOR/NEXT blocks.

Action: Change the location of BREAK instruction.

00002: needs one and more scan program. – There is no scan program in the current PLC item, which causes an error.

Page 327: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 329 11/09 Honeywell

Action: Add an applicable program item to the Project Scan Program.

00003: There is no program to check – There is no program in the current PLC item.

Action: Add a scan program and try again.

E1300: An element (instruction) not available in UDF (User Defined Function).

Action: The function block and positive (negative) transition pulse contact point (coil) are not available in UDF.

ATTENTION

The elements cannot be inserted in UDF Edit but they can be inserted by using Paste and other functions in other programs.

E1310: The return value needs at least, one or more outputs.

Action: The VAR_RETURN type variable is not designated in UDF, which causes an error. Check whether the variable is used in the program.

E1400: needs the TRANS output.

Page 328: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

330 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Action: TRANS variable is not designated as the output in the SFC Transition Program created by LD, which causes an error. Check whether the variable is used as output in the program.

E5000: Needs one or more INIT_DONE instruction to end the initialization task.

Action: although the initialization task is added, the conditions to end the initialization task are not designated. To normally end the scan program, the conditions to end the initialization task must be designated.

L0700: Undeclared variable

Action: the variable used as the IO parameter of contact point, coil and function (Block) is not declared. Check whether the variable is declared in the local variable.

L0701: Input unsuitable data type.

Action: the type of used address or variable is not suitable. Check the type of used address or variable.

L0702: Invalid input connection

Action: The line connection of function (block) is only available for BOOL type. The input here needs a non-BOOL type input.

L0703: Function (block) cannot have more than one input line.

Action: Check the connection to ensure that the Function (block) does not have more than one input line.

Page 329: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 331 11/09 Honeywell

L0704: Invalid output connection

Action: The line connection of function (block) is only available for BOOL type. Since line cannot be connected to other type but BOOL, check the line output.

L0705: Function (block) must not have more than one output line.

Action: Function (block) must not have more than one output line. Check the line connection.

L0706: Incorrect function IO type

Action: In case of the function (block) having ANY type as the IO parameter, the data type of IO parameter indicated as ANY type must be the same. Check the data type of the input IO parameter.

Page 330: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

8. Programming 8.3. Check Program

332 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

If the strict data type check is not set in the program check options, it checks the only IO parameter size of function (block).

L0707: The size of array is not same.

Action: The size of array used in MOVE function as the IO parameter must be same.

L0708: Unknown function.

Action: Unavailable function. Check whether the function is user-defined function.

L0709: Instance name is omitted.

Action: The instance name is omitted in the function block. Check the input items.

L0710: Instance type is not the same.

Action: The instance type of function block is not identical with the function block. Check the input items.

L0711: Undeclared instance

Action: The function block instance is not declared in the local variable. Declare the function block instance in the local variable before use.

Page 331: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 333 11/09 Honeywell

9. Find/Replace

9.1 Find Address The Find/Replace function is used to find or change the address and the String in LD, SFC and Variable/Comment of SoftMaster.

This function is used to find the address previously made in LD Editor, SFC Editor, or Variable/Comment Editor.

To find an address, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Click Find/Replace>Find Address on the menu.

Field Label Description

Find what Used to specify the address to find.

Include all sub-addresses/variable names

Used to select the address type containing the address to find. Then, if selecting the checkbox, it finds %IB0.1.0, %IW0.1.0, %IL0.1.0 and others containing %IX0.1.1.

Output to pane 2 SoftMaster has two Find result windows. The result is displayed in Find 1 result window, but if the Output to pane 2 is selected, the result is displayed in Find 2 result window.

Page 332: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.1. Find Address

334 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Direction Used to specify the location to find upward or downward from the line currently selected in the respective editor.

Range Selects it to find by designating a specific line after designating the direction. If Range is selected, the start and end lines must be also entered.

Find Next Finds the detail specified above right in the next to the line (position) currently selected. If the applicable address is found, the position the applicable address is located is selected.

Find All Finds all the details specified above to display the result on the find result window.

Advanced>> It is only applicable in LD editor. Click Advanced>> to expand and Advanced<< to close the selection. It is used to find specific contact point, specific coil and extended function and function/function block used in LD editor

Page 333: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.1. Find Address

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 335 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

ATTENTION

The result is displayed on the find window only with Find All run.

Since Find All finds all details in the applicable documents, it is insignificant to select the direction.

Advanced>> is displayed only in Ladder editor.

Advanced>> (extension) is as shown in the following figure.

Find Next Address

It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable, Variable and Local Variable in common.

Details of this function are described as follows, based on LD.

Page 334: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.1. Find Address

336 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

To find the next address, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the basic cell of the direction.

2 Select Find/Replace > Find Address.

3 Specify the address to find, the direction and the options.

4 Click Find Next. If address is found identical to the detail as specified on the dialog box any, move to the address whose cell is identical.

Page 335: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.1. Find Address

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 337 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

ATTENTION

If no address identical to the specified address is found, the following message appears.

Find Next finds all the current programs based on the selected cell when the address find dialog box is displayed. If the direction is set Downward, it starts finding the address from the cell next to the selected cell to the last cell of the program, and then from the starting cell of the program.

Page 336: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.1. Find Address

338 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Find All Address

It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable and Local Variable in common.

Details of this function are described below based on LD.

To find all addresses, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Find/Replace > Find Address.

2 Specify the address to find, the direction and the options.

3 Click Find All. Find All yields its result on the find message window as in the following figure.

4 On the find window, select the line to find and then click Enter to move the cell to the line of the applicable LD program.

Page 337: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.1. Find Address

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 339 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

ATTENTION

Find All finds the address in all the programs included in the current PLC.

Page 338: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.2. Find Text

340 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

9.2 Find Text

Finding text

This function is used to find the String of Rung Comment, Variable, Variable Comment, Application Instruction and Label.

It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable, Variable and Local Variable. The following description is based on LD.

To find text, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the basic cell of the direction.

1 Select Find/Replace > Find Text.

Page 339: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.2. Find Text

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 341 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

Find what: Used to specify the String to find.

Match whole word only

Selecting All Identical finds the string only exactly identical to the string specified in the detail to find. If it is not selected, it also finds the string where the detail to find is included.

Case-sensitive Selecting this option finds the string exactly identical to the string.

Output to pane 2 SoftMaster has two Find result windows. The result is displayed in the Find 1 result window, but if the Output to pane 2 is selected, the result is displayed in Find 2 result window.

Direction Used to specify the location to find upward or downward from the line currently selected in the respective editor.

Find Next Finds the detail specified above right in the next to the line (position) currently selected. If the applicable String is found, the position the applicable String is located is selected.

Find All Finds all the details specified to display the result on the Find result window.

Range If Range is selected, Find String is run in a specific step. If Range is selected, the start and last steps must be also entered.

Page 340: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.2. Find Text

342 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Advanced>> It is only used in LD editor. ‘Advanced>>’ and ‘Advanced<<’ is changed by click. It is used to find specific contact point, specific coil and application instruction used in LD editor.

2 Specify the String to find, the selection options and the direction.

3 Click Find Next. If a string identical to the specified detail is found on the dialog box, it moves to the string whose cell is identical.

Page 341: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.2. Find Text

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 343 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

If no string identical to the specified string is found, the following message appears.

Find Next finds the current programs based on the selected cell when the String Find dialog box is displayed. If the direction is set Downward, it begins finding the String from the cell next to the selected cell to the last cell of the program, and then from the starting cell of the program.

Page 342: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.2. Find Text

344 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

The result is displayed on the Find windows 1 or 2 only when Find All is run.

Since Find All finds all details in the applicable documents, the direction is not significant to select.

Advanced>> is displayed only in LD editor.

Advanced>> (extension) and Advanced<< (shrink) is as shown below.

Page 343: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.2. Find Text

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 345 11/09 Honeywell

Find All String

It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable and Local Variable in common.

To find a particular string, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Find/Replace > Find String.

2 Specify the string to find, the selection options and the direction.

3 Click Find All. Find All displays the results on the find message window as in the following figure.

Page 344: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.2. Find Text

346 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

4 On the find window, select the line to find and then click Enter to move the cell to the line of the applicable LD program.

ATTENTION

Find All finds the String in all the programs included in the current PLC.

Page 345: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.3. Address Replacement

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 347 11/09 Honeywell

9.3 Address Replacement

Replace Address

This function is used to change the address previously made in LD Editor, IL Editor, or Variable/Comment Editor.

It is used for LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment. This function is used to find a previously created address. Details of this function are described as follows based on LD.

To replace an address, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the basic cell of the direction.

2 Select Find/Replace > Replace Address.

3 Specify the details to find and replace the type and the direction.

Page 346: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.3. Address Replacement

348 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Field Label Description

Find what Used to specify the address to find.

Replace with Used to specify the address to replace.

Find including lower type

If selecting the checkbox when finding the address containing the address input in Find With, it finds %IB0.1.0, %ID0.1.0, %IL0.1.0 and others including %IX0.1.1.

Replace with range If checking Mass Change, the number of address and the coverage to match the change so that the addresses can be mass changed.

Include Variable Selects whether to replace the variable/comment of the input address with the variable/comment of the address to replace. That is, select whether to replace with the variable/comment of the address.

Range Designates the number of address for mass change. It is activated only when the Mass Change checkbox is selected.

Area Selects whether to contain by address types. If mass changing %IL0.0.1, for instance, they can be mass changed by selecting bit, byte, word and double word less than L area respectively.

Direction Used to specify the location to find upward or downward from the line currently selected in the corresponding editor.

Range If selecting Range, Address Change can be run within a specific line. If selecting Range, the start and last lines must be also entered.

Find Next Finds the detail specified above right in the next to the line (position) currently selected. If the applicable address is found, the position the applicable address is located is selected.

Replace Replaces the address as specified above based on the currently selected position (line).

Page 347: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.3. Address Replacement

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 349 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Replace All Replaces all the details specified above after found.

Advanced>> It is only used in Ladder editor. Advanced>> and Advanced<< is changed by click. It is used to find specific contact point, specific coil and extended function/function block used in Ladder editor.

4 Click Replace. The selected cell is replaced with the address specified for

replacement.

Page 348: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.3. Address Replacement

350 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

Replace finds all the current programs based on the selected cell when the address Replace dialog box is displayed. If the direction is set downward, it starts to find the address identical from the cell selected to the last of the programs, and then the address identical again from the first of the programs to the basic cell.

The direction need not be selected in case of Replace All.

If Replace with range is selected, Replace All only is available.

Advanced>> is displayed only in LD editor

Message box is same as described in the Find Address section when ‘Advanced’ is used.

Replace All Addresses

It is used for the LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment editor. This is used to find the previously created address.

Replacing All Addresses

To replace all addresses, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Find/Replace > Replace Address.

2 Specify the details to find and Replace the type and the direction.

Page 349: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.3. Address Replacement

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 351 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 Click Replace All.

4 On completion of the Replace All in the current program, the following message box appears.

Page 350: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.3. Address Replacement

352 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Replace with range

It is used to change consecutive addresses in bulk. For example, the addresses of %MX1 ~ %MX10 can be changed to %MX100 ~ %MX109.

Ex) if the detail to fine is %MX1, the detail to change is %MX100 and the number of address is 10,

To replace the number of addresses with a range, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Find/Replace > Replace Address.

2 Specify the details to Find and Replace the type and the direction, check the Range Replace box and then enter the number of addresses to Replace with range.

3 Click Replace All.

Page 351: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.3. Address Replacement

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 353 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

Replace with range is available only for the addresses, not for the constants.

Page 352: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.4. Text Replacement

354 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

9.4 Text Replacement

Replace text string

This function is used to find and replace the text string of Comment, Variable, etc. except the address.

It is used for LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment editor in common. It is used to find the previously created addresses. Details of this function are described as follows based on the LD.

ATTENTION

Advanced>> is displayed only in Ladder editor

Page 353: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.4. Text Replacement

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 355 11/09 Honeywell

To replace a string, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the basic cell of the direction.

2 On the menu, select Find/Replace > Replace String.

3 Specify the String to find and replace the selection options and the direction.

Field Label Description

Replace With Used to specify the string to find.

Find What Used to specify the string to replace.

Match whole word only

If Match whole word only is selected, it finds the string exactly identical to the string specified.

Case-sensitive If this selected, it finds the string only exactly identical to the string with Case-sensitive characters sorted out. If not selected, it finds the string in characters not sorted out.

Include variable If this selected, the variable is also replaced as applicable when the string is replaced. If this is not selected, the variable is not included in the replace when the string is replaced.

Direction Used to specify the location to find upward or downward from the line currently selected in the

Page 354: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.4. Text Replacement

356 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

respective editor.

Range If selecting a range, Replace String can be run within a specific line. If Range is selected, the first and last steps must be entered.

Find Next Finds the detail specified above right in the next to the line (position) currently selected. If the applicable string is found, the cell moves to the position the applicable string is located.

Replace Replaces the detail specified above after found.

Replace All Replaces all the details specified have been found.

Advanced>> It is only used in Ladder editor. Advanced>> and Advanced<< is changed by click. It is used to find specific contact point, specific coil, extended function, function/function block used in Ladder editor.

4 Click Replace. The selected string is replaced with the string specified for

replacement.

Page 355: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.4. Text Replacement

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 357 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

Replace is available only when the string of the cell currently selected is identical to the detail to find as specified on the dialog box.

Click Replace to move to the next cell identical to the detail to find as specified on the dialog box regardless of the execution of Replace.

Replace find all the current programs based on the selected cell when the address Replace dialog box is displayed.

Replace finds all the current programs based on the selected cell when the address Replace dialog box is displayed. If the direction is set downward, it starts to find the address identical from the cell selected to the last of the programs, and then the address identical again from the first of the programs to the basic cell.

Replace finds all the current programs based on the selected cell when the Replace String dialog box is displayed. If the direction is set downward, it starts to find the string identical from the cell selected to the last of the programs, and then again from the first of the programs to the basic cell.

Replace All String

It is used for LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment editor. It is used to find the previously created address.

To replace all strings, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Find/Replace > Replace String.

Page 356: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.4. Text Replacement

358 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

2 Specify the details to Find and Replace the selection options and the direction.

3 Click Replace All.

4 If Replace All is complete in the current program, the following message box appears for you to decide to Replace in the other programs.

Page 357: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.4. Text Replacement

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 359 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Page 358: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

9. Find/Replace 9.5. Find Again

360 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

9.5 Find Again Find Again is used to find the details of Find Address or Find String again if once run previously. If Find was not run previously, it is inactive.

Select Find/Replace > Find Again.

Page 359: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 361 11/09 Honeywell

10. Parameters

10.1 Basic Parameter

Basic Parameter Setting

It is used to specify the basic parameters related with the PLC operation.

To access Basic Parameter settings:

Step Action

1 On the project tree, double-click Parameter > Basic Parameters.

2

Field Label Description

Basic Operation Settings

: used to specify setting of basic operation, time, restart method and output control of [Basic Parameters] information

Fixed period operation

: used to decide to run the PLC program based on the fixed period operation or based on the scan time.

Fixed period operation time setting

If (b) Fixed period operation above is checked, enter the operation time in ms unit.

Page 360: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.1. Basic Parameter

362 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Watch Dog timer Used to specify the time value of the scan watch-dog timer to keep PLC from stopping due to program error.

Standard input filter Used to specify the standard input value. For more details, refer section on Detailed Module Information Setting.

Restart mode Sets the restart mode. Select either cold or warm restart.

Output during debugging

Used to decide to output the data to the output module as usual or not even while being debugged.

Keep Output when an error occurs

Used to decide to output the data to the module as usual or not even when an error or a specific input occurs.

Keep Output when converting RUN->STOP

Used to decide to output the data to the module as usual or not even when PLC operation mode changes from RUN to STOP.

Keep Output when STOP->RUN

Used to decide to output the data to the module as usual or not even when PLC operation mode changes from STOP to RUN.

Delete all areas except latch when an error occurs

Used to decide to delete the memory area with no latch specified in case an error occurs during RUN.

4 Device Area setup tab: used to specify the area to preserve (latch area) of

[Basic Parameters] information even when PLC power is off.

Page 361: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.1. Basic Parameter

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 363 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

Select latch area Used to specify data area to preserve. It is the representative flag to control area 1 and area 2 of the right latch area table. If the check box is not selected, value specified in the right latch area table will be ignored.

It is used to specify desired latch area for each device, to decide to use the respective device and to select the area. Area 1 and area 2 cannot be used as overlapped, and the maximum size of each latch area is the maximum size of the device area.

Timer boundary Timer areas are divided into 100ms, 10ms, 1ms and 0.1ms. This area can be selected as the latch area within the specified value of the left timer limit area. Like other devices the areas cannot be set as overwritten. The number of timers to use can be adjusted, and the value specified will have a great influence on the timer of LD diagram or IL program. Default for setting value of each timer is as follows;

Page 362: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.1. Basic Parameter

364 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

T100ms Start: 0 End: 999

T10ms Start: 1000 End: 1499

T1ms Start: 1500 End: 1999

T0.1ms Start: 2000 End: 2047

When the timer limit specified is the default, the timer will be automatically in 100ms unit with T100 if used in LD diagram. It is because T100 is in the area of T100ms. In order to use the timer with a cycle of 10ms in basic setting, optional address among T1000 ~ T1499 needs to be used. You can specify the timer area of each cycle to assign more memory areas to the cycle desired to apply more.

In timer limit setting, different cycles can be set as overlapped. In addition, since Start and End of the area are always 0 and 2047 fixed, their modification is unavailable. Each cycle needs to be used with its size divided in this area.

5 Error Operation Setup tab: Specifies the operation method when an error

occurs on the PLC.

Page 363: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.1. Basic Parameter

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 365 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

Continue running when an arithmetic error occurs

If this option is selected, the PLC runs even if an arithmetic error occurs during PLC RUN.

Continue running when a floating point error occurs

If this option is selected, the PLC runs even if a floating decimal point error occurs during PLC RUN.

Continue running when a fuse error occurs

If this option is selected, the PLC runs even if an error occurs on the fuse connection status of the module during PLC RUN.

Continue running when an I/O module error occurs

If this option is selected, the PLC runs even if an error occurs on an I/O module during PLC RUN.

Continue running when a special module error occurs

If this option is selected, the PLC runs even if an error occurs on the special module during PLC RUN.

Continue running when a communication module error occurs

If this option is selected, the PLC runs even if an error occurs on the communication module.

6 MODBUS Setup tab: Specifies MODBUS basic information among [Basic

Parameters] information

Page 364: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.1. Basic Parameter

366 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Field Label Description

Station number Specifies the station Number used for MODBUS communication. 0~63 is available for the range.

Data BIT Changes the number of data bits used for each String received. It is set identical to the value specified in the PLC communicating with the user. Most data is transferred in 7 or 8 data bits.

Stop BIT Changes the time (if time is measured in bit) required to transfer each String.

Baud rate The maximum speed of the data to transfer through this port is specified in bps (bit/sec). The maximum speed is normally specified as much as supported by the communicating computer or device.

Parity BIT Specifies the parity bit.

Serial mode Specify the transference mode. ASCII communication and RTU communication are available.

Digital Input start address

Used to specify the start address of DI (Digital Input) memory area to read through MODBUS,

Page 365: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.1. Basic Parameter

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 367 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

where the value should be specified in Word unit.

Digital Output start address

Used to specify the start address of DO (Digital Output) memory area to read through MODBUS, where the value should be specified in Word unit.

Analog Input start address

Used to specify the start address of AI (Analog Input) memory area to read through MODBUS, where the value should be specified in Word unit.

Analog Output start address

Used to specify the start address of AO (Analog Output) memory area to read through MODBUS, where the value should be specified in Word unit.

TIP

Configure the Snet module before configuring the Modbus Server or client in serial mode.

Configure the FEnet module before configuring the Modbus Server or client in TCP mode.

The above settings are accomplished on an extra port in the CPU which is exclusively for Modbus Server in the Serial Mode which eliminates the need for using extra Snet or FEnet module. Refer to the 2MLI CPUU manual to check whether your CPU supports this additional option.

Page 366: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.1. Basic Parameter

368 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

Restart Mode

Restart mode is used to define the restart method of CPU when a Restart command is issued to the CPU.

Cold Restart

To initiate a cold restart, set the restart mode as cold restart.

All data is cleared and the initial value of variables is set to zero.

Even though the parameter is set to warm restart mode, it starts in cold restart mode when it is run just after the program is changed.

Pressing RESET switch during operation (same with online reset instruction), starts in the cold restart mode, regardless of the restart mode set in the parameter.

Warm Restart

1. It is run when setting the restart mode of parameter as warm restart.

2. In case of a warm restart, the following happen:

The data set to remain the previous value remain the previous value.

The data set only with the initial value are set with the initial values.

All other data is cleared to ‘0’.

3. If data is abnormal although the parameter is set in the warm restart (data preservation against interruption is not available), it is run in the cold restart mode.

Page 367: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 369 11/09 Honeywell

10.2 I/O Parameters

Setting I/O parameters

It is used to specify the I/O type configured in the PLC slot and to set the applicable parameters for each slot.

To access I/O Parameters settings:

Step Action

1 On the project tree, select Parameter > I/O Parameters.

2

Field Label Description

All Base Displays base module information and module information per slot. In case module is not designated in slot, it’s displayed as ‘Default’.

Set Base Displays the already set base.

Module List Displays the base module information and the module information based on slots. If no module is configured in the slot

Slot Information Edits or displays base’s module type for each slot

Delete Slot Deletes all information of the currently selected slot.

Delete Base Deletes all information of the currently selected

Page 368: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

370 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

base.

Base Setting Sets base number of currently selected base.

Delete All Deletes the configured module and information of all bases.

Details Displays detailed module information.

Print Prints the module type and the module’s parameter information specified in the slot.

OK Applies the changed items and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

ATTENTION

The 2MLI project type supports the fixed allocation type only. Therefore, the allocation information column is always displayed as disabled.

Fixed point assignment and variable point assignment are available for the module assignment method. The fixed point assignment assigns 64 points collectively to a slot while the variable point assignment depends on the module type. Exceptionally 32 points is assigned to the special/communication module, and 16 points to the empty slot.

The table below shows the differences between variable assignment and fixed assignment, based on the basic base.

Slot Module Name Variable Assignment Fixed Assignment

0 16-point Input P00000 ~ P0000F P00000 ~ P0003F

1 16-point Output

P00010 ~ P0001F P00040 ~ P0007F

2 A/D Module P00020 ~ P0002F P00080 ~ P0011F

3 Communication Module

P00030 ~ P0003F P00120 ~ P0015F

4 16-point P00050 ~ P0005F P00200 ~ P0023F

Page 369: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 371 11/09 Honeywell

Output

REFERENCE - INTERNAL

For additional information on the communication module information setting, see SoftMaster-NM manual.

For additional information on the positioning module, see APM User’s Guide.

Base Module Setup

Setting the information for a Base Module

It is used to specify the base information about a module.

To set the Base Module Information, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the base module to specify from the address list (Base 00 to base 07).

2 Right click and select Base Setting. Or click the Base Setting.

Field Label Description

Slot Used to enter the maximum number of slots in the base.

OK Applies the changed items and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

Page 370: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

372 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

If the specified number of slots is less than the maximum number of slots, the remaining area is not unavailable for editing.

Delete Base Module

To delete the Base Module Information, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the base module to delete from the address list.

2 Right click the mouse and select Delete Base.

3 You are prompted to confirm the deletion. Click OK to delete the information of the applicable base module.

Module Information Setting Based on Slots

Module type and detailed module information is described based on slots.

To set the module information settings based on slots:

Step Action

1 Select the slot to specify the module in the slot information.

2 Select the arrow of the Module to display the module selection box. Or Right click the mouse and select Edit.

This is applicable only when a module is already configured in the slot.

Page 371: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 373 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 Click the selection box to select the module.

4 Select the description column and then right click to select Edit. And enter the description for the applicable slot.

ATTENTION

The module description can contain a maximum of 128 English characters.

Page 372: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

374 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

I/O Parameter Edit Function

Data editing details of Copy, Cut and Paste, based on slots is described as follows:

Copy/Paste

To copy and paste a selected slot, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the slot to copy.

2 Right click the module and select Copy.

3 Select the slot to paste.

4 Right click to select Paste.

Page 373: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 375 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Cut/Paste

To cut and paste a selected slot, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the slot to cut.

2 Right-click to select Cut.

3 Select the slot to paste.

4 Right-click to select Paste.

Undo

To undo a particular action, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the slot to delete.

2 Right-click and select Delete.

Page 374: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

376 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

3 Right-click to select Undo.

ATTENTION

A maximum of 20 last actions can be revoked using the Undo feature.

Redo

To redo a particular action:

Right-click the mouse and select Redo.

Page 375: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 377 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

A maximum of 20 actions can be revoked or invoked using the Undo and Redo functions.

The shortcut keys used in I/O Parameters Edit cannot be used as the user defined shortcut key specified in SoftMaster.

Click the mouse once on a slot to selects one slot. To select multiple slots, click the mouse on a slot and drag it down to multiple slots.

Detailed Module Information Setting

Double-click or click Details to view the detailed module information setting.

Input module setting

For input module setting, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Double-click on I/O Parameters on the tree-view. The I/O Parameter setting dialog box is displayed.

2 Double-click an input module. The following dialog box is displayed

Page 376: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

378 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Field Label Description

Filter Used to specify the filter constant value for the input.

OK Applies the specified details and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

3 Click OK to apply the setting

ATTENTION

Digital module with the input of AC cannot specify the filter value.

Standard value of the input filter is specified in basic parameters. For details on the Basic Parameters, refer to section on Basic Parameters.

The input filter used for checking the input signal does not change for the filtering time. The following figure is with the input filter value of 3ms. As the input signal is the same for 3ms from the moment detected, it is processed as normal input signal after 3ms.

Page 377: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 379 11/09 Honeywell

Output module

For input module setting, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Double-click I/O Parameters on the tree-view. The I/O Parameter setting dialog box is displayed.

2 Double-click an output module. The following dialog box is displayed.

Field Label Description

Channel One channel is assigned for 8 points, and the emergent output mode can be specified per channel.

OK Applies the specified details and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

3 Click OK to apply the setting

Page 378: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

380 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

Emergency output value is specified when the CPU is abruptly stopped during RUN.

Default for the emergency output is Hold.

Module Reservation

It assigns the points of module only without any specific module specified. 16, 32 and 64 points are available for the assignment.

A/I Module

On the I/O Parameter Setting Dialog box, select A/I module and then click Details to display the Parameter Setting Dialog box as follows.

For A/I module setting, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Double-click I/O Parameters on the tree-view. The I/O Parameter setting dialog box is displayed.

2 Double click an A/I module. The following dialog box is displayed

Field Label Description

All Parameters Settings If this is selected, changing the parameter item value, changes all the channels’ applicable parameter values.

Maximum/Minimum Value Display

As for the parameter item to input figures, if the user inputs data, an applicable range is displayed on the bottom of the dialog box automatically. If the user changes the parameter value to any other value than the

Page 379: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 381 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

default, the String color changes from Black to Blue.

OK Applies the specified details and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

3 Click OK to apply the setting

Parameter Setting Items Default

Channels Disable/Enable Disable

Input Range

1~5V/0~5V/0~10V/-10~10V (Voltage Type)

4~20mA/0~20mA (Current Type)

1~5V

4~20mA

Output Type

0~16000/-8000~8000/1000-5000/0~10000%

(Input range changes based on items)

0~16000

Filter Process Disable/Enable Disable

Filter Constants 1-99 1

Average Process Disable/Enable Disable

Average Method Count Average/Time Average

Count Average

Average Value Count Average 2-64000, Time Average 4-16000

2

Analog output module

On the I/O Parameters Setting dialog box, select A/O module and then click Details to display the Parameters Setting dialog box and set the details.

Page 380: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

382 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

For A/O module setting, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Double-click I/O Parameters on the tree-view. The I/O Parameter setting dialog box is displayed.

2 Double click an A/O module. The following dialog box is displayed

Field Label Description

All Parameters Settings If this is selected, changing the parameter item value, changes all the channels’ applicable parameter values. If the user changes the parameter value to any other value than the default, the String color changes from Black to Blue.

OK Applies the specified details and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

3 Click OK to apply the setting

Parameter Setting Items Default

Channels STOP/RUN STOP

Output Range

1~5V/0~5V/0~10V/-10~10V (Voltage Type)

4~20mA/0~20mA (Current Type)

1~5V

4~20mA

Input Type 0~16000/-8000~8000/1000-

0~16000

Page 381: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 383 11/09 Honeywell

Parameter Setting Items Default

5000/0~10000%

(changed based on output range)

Channel Output Type Previous/minimum/middle/maximum Value

Previous Value

High-speed Counter Module

On the I/O Parameters Setting Dialog box, select High Speed counter module and then click Details to display the Parameters Setting dialog box.

For High-speed Counter module setting, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Double-click I/O Parameters on the tree-view. The I/O Parameter setting dialog box is displayed.

2 Double-click a high speed counter module. The following dialog box is displayed.

Page 382: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

384 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Field Label Description

Parameter Area Displays the parameter item. And if the user changes the parameter value other than the default

Maximum/Minimum value Display

When entering a numerical value for a parameter

OK Applies the specified details and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

3 Click OK to apply the setting

Parameter Setting Items Default

Counter Mode Linear Counter/Ring Counter Linear Counter

Pulse Input Mode

2-phase 1-multiplier/2-phase 2-multiplier/

2-phase 4-multiplier/CW-CCW/

1-phase 1-input 1-multiplier/

1-phase 1-input 2-multiplier/

1-phase 2-input 1-multiplier/1-phase 2-input 2-multiplier

2-phase

1-multiplier

Additional Function Mode

N/A/Count clear/Count latch/

Sampling count/Measure input frequency /

Measure rotations per unit time/Count Disable

N/A

Range Value [msec] 0-60000 0

Compared Output 0 Mode (Single Compare) less/(Single Compare) less

(Single Compare)

Page 383: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 385 11/09 Honeywell

Parameter Setting Items Default

or equal/

(Single Compare) equal/(Single Compare) equal or greater/

(Single Compare) greater/(Section Compare) included/ (Section Compare)excluded

less

Compared Output 1 Mode As identical as specified above

(Single Compare)

less

Preset Input Value -2147483648-2147483647 0

Ring Counter, Minimum Value

-2147483648-2147483647 0

Ring Counter, Maximum Value

-2147483648-2147483647 0

Compared Output 0 Minimum Setting Value

-2147483648-2147483647 0

Compared Output 0 Maximum Setting Value

-2147483648-2147483647 0

Compared Output 1 Minimum Setting Value

-2147483648-2147483647 0

Compared Output 1 Maximum Setting Value

-2147483648-2147483647 0

Number of Pulses per Rotation

0-60000 0

Frequency Display mode 1Hz/10Hz/100Hz/1000Hz 1Hz

HS Counter Parameter Items

ATTENTION

“Pulse/Rev value” item among High-speed counter parameter items is active when the Auxiliary Mode is set to “Revolution/Unit time”.

Page 384: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

386 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

REFERENCE - INTERNAL

For additional information on the communication module, see SoftMaster NM Manual.

For additional information on the positioning module, see the APM manual.

I/O Parameter Print Function

This function is used for printing the specified I/O parameter and detailed module information specified.

Print Option Setting

To print the specified I/O parameter:

On I/O Parameter Setting dialog box, select Print > Print.

a) Print All: Prints all I/O configuration table and detailed module information.

Page 385: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 387 11/09 Honeywell

b) I/O Configuration Table: Prints I/O parameter's module setting details based on slots, description and I/O information assigned.

c) Detailed Info of Each Module: Prints the detailed module information for the specified slot module.

Print Preview

To view the Print Preview, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the I/O Parameter Setting dialog box, select Print > Print.

2 On the Print dialog box, click Preview.

Copy to Clipboard

It is used for printing the I/O parameter table to the clipboard, thus to add onto the String editor, word processor or spread sheet.

To copy the data to windows clipboard:

On the I/O Parameter dialog box, select Print > copy to Clipboard.

ATTENTION

Only I/O configuration table can be copied to clipboard.

Page 386: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

10. Parameters 10.2. I/O Parameters

388 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Page 387: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 389 11/09 Honeywell

11. Online

11.1 Connection Options for the PLC It is used to specify the connection network with the PLC.

Local Connection Setting

RS-232C or USB connection is available for Local Connect Setting.

Select Online > Connection Settings.

Field Description

Type Used to specify communication media (RS-232C, USB, Ethernet and Modem) to connect to the PLC.

Depth Used to specify the connection configuration (Remote 1 and Remote 2) with PLC.

Connect Clicking Connect attempts to connect to PLC using the specified options.

Settings… Allows detailed setting based on the selected Connection Type.

Page 388: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.1. Connection Options for the PLC

390 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Field Description

Preview Used to see a graphical preview of all Connect Options.

Timeout interval

Time-out defines the time after which the attempt to establish communication with the PLC is given up.

Retrial times

Defines the number of times to retry connecting to the PLC if communication connection fails.

Read/Write data size in PLC run mode

Used to specify the frame size of data to transfer. This option is available only when the PLC operation is in Run mode. In other modes of operation, data is transferred in the maximum frame size.

Using the Local RS-232C

To connect through the local RS-232C, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the Connection Type of RS-232C.

2 Click Setting to specify communication speed and communication COM port.

Page 389: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.1. Connection Options for the PLC

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 391 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 Click OK to save the Connection Options.

ATTENTION

Default is RS-232C COM1 with the communication speed of 115200bps.

38400bps and 115200bps available for communication speed.

Communication speed is 115200bps for 2MLK Series.

Communication ports of COM1 ~ COM8 are available.

If USB serial device is used, a virtual COM port is applied to the communication port. Check the device administrator to ensure the specified port number.

Connection in SoftMaster and Connection in SoftMaster-NM, address monitoring and system monitoring are available with one PLC at the same time. However, it is the same Connect Options.

Page 390: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.1. Connection Options for the PLC

392 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Using the Local USB

To connect using the local USB, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the Connection Type as USB.

2 USB has no detailed setting options. Hence Setting is disabled.

3 Click OK to save the Connection Options.

ATTENTION

USB device driver has to be installed for the USB to connect to the PLC. Install the USB device driver before attempting to connect to the PLC.

The USB driver is automatically installed along with SoftMaster. Refer to section on SoftMaster Installation for details.

Remote 1 Connect Setting

Connecting using Ethernet

To set the connection to Ethernet, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the Connection Type as Ethernet.

2 Click Setting to specify Ethernet IP.

Specify the IP address of the PLC CPU to be connected.

Page 391: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.1. Connection Options for the PLC

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 393 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 Click OK to save the Connection Options.

ATTENTION

IP is as specified in Ethernet communication module.

The connection to PLC CPU can be tested using ping command from PC.

Modem Connect

To connect using the Modem, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the Connection Type as Modem.

2 Click Setting to specify modem details as illustrated in the following figure.

Page 392: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.1. Connection Options for the PLC

394 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Field Description

Modem Type Enter the modem type available to connect. Snet communication module has exclusive modem functions.

Port number Enter the modem’s communication port.

Baud rate Enter the modem’s communication speed.

Phone number Enter the phone number of the modem if it is a dial-up modem.

Station number Enter the station Number specified in the communication module of Remote Step 1.

RS-232C or USB Remote Connect

To connect to RS-232C or USB remotely, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the Connection Type as RS-232C/USB.

2 Select the Depth as Remote 1.

3 Click Settings and click the Remote 1 tab to specify Remote 1 settings.

Page 393: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.1. Connection Options for the PLC

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 395 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Description

Network type Used to specify PLC communication module type for remote connection, Snet, FEnet and FDEnet are available for the communication modules

Base number Used to specify communication module’s base number of local PLC base.

Slot number Used to specify communication module’s slot number of local PLC base.

Station number Used to input communication module’s specified station Number of Remote 1.

IP address Used to input communication module’s specified IP address of Remote 1.

Snet channel Select the connection channel port if the communication module of Remote.1 connection is Snet module

Page 394: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.1. Connection Options for the PLC

396 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

Only if the network type is FEnet, the IP address is active. If not, IP address is inactive with the Station number active

Base number of 0~7 and slot number of 0~15 is available.

Remote 2 Connect Setting

a) Network type: used to specify PLC communication module type for remote connection. Snet, FEnet and FDEnet are available for the communication modules.

b) Base number: used to specify communication module’s base number of local PLC base.

c) Slot number: used to specify communication module’s slot number of local PLC base.

d) Station number: used to input communication module’s specified station Number of Remote 1.

e) IP address: used to input communication module’s specified IP address of Remote 1.

Page 395: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 397 11/09 Honeywell

11.2 Online Functions

Connect

This option is used to connect to the PLC based on the specified Connect Options.

To connect to a PLC using a specified connection option, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Online > Connect.

2 The following dialog appears while connecting.

3 If connected to the PLC, the Online menu and Online status is displayed.

4 If a password has been setup in the PLC, you are prompted to enter the Password.

5 Connection is established if the input password matches the PLC password.

Page 396: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

398 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

If the connection to the PLC is fast, the dialog box may appear and disappear quickly while connecting.

After the connection has been established, the PLC’s status is displayed beside the project name on the project window and on the status display line.

If any other application program is already connected to the PLC, its main Online functions are not available.

After the PLC is connected, connecting its cable to another PLC disconnects the previous PLC automatically.

When Disconnect is run, Monitor and Debug functions also end.

Page 397: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 399 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

Check Points when connection fails.

1. RS-232C

Check if RS-232C cable connection between Computer and PLC is correct

Check if the COM ports number of the computer matches with the COM port number where the cable is connected.

Check if the RS-232C cable connections are correct.

Check if the status of PLC is normal.

2. USB

Check if the USB cable connection between the Computer and PLC is correct

Check if the computer identified the PLC as an USB device during the connection.

a) Connect the computer and PLC with an USB cable.

For additional details, see section on Verifying the USB device driver installation.

ATTENTION

a) Click Start>Run.

b) Enter command in the Run dialog box

c) Run ping test for Ethernet module from the Command Prompt. Type ping <IP address of CPU> and press Enter. If the Ethernet module

Page 398: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

400 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

responds normally, the screen shows the communication status as in the following figure. If the Ethernet module does not respond, the screen displays the Time out message.

Check if the status of PLC is normal.

Page 399: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 401 11/09 Honeywell

Write

It is used to transfer user programs, parameters and comments to the PLC.

To transfer user programs, parameters and comment to the PLC, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 To connect to PLC via Online, select Online > Connect.

2 Select Online > Write.

3 Select the data to transfer to the PLC and then click OK to start transfer the selected data to PLC.

Field Label Description

Selection Tree Selects the data to transfer to PLC.

OK Starts to transfer the data to PLC if clicked.

Cancel Cancels the writing of data.

Page 400: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

402 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

a) Displays the current Write/Read item in progress.

b) Displays the data size of the item (current item’s size/ all items’ size)

c) Displays progressing rate of the current item.

d) Displays progressing rate of all items.

e) Displays progressing time elapsed until current.

f) Cancel: Stops transferring the data.

ATTENTION

The special module parameter Write is available only when I/O parameter Write is selected.

Parameter Write takes more time during CPU RUN than in CPU STOP mode.

Read

It is used to transfer user programs, parameters and comments from the PLC to a current project.

To upload the data in PLC and to apply them to a new project, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 To connect to PLC, select Online > Connect.

2 Select Online > Read.

Page 401: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 403 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 Select items to upload from the PLC and click OK. The uploaded items are applied to the current project.

A message is displayed to confirm that the reading is complete.

ATTENTION

Refer to the section on Write for the description of each Dialog.

Change Mode

It is used to convert the operation mode of the PLC in operation.

To change the PLC operation mode, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 To connect to the PLC, select Online > Connect.

2 Select Online > Change Mode > Run/Stop/Debug.

3 PLC operation mode changes as selected by the user.

Page 402: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

404 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

Ensure that PLC’s remote dip switch is ON with the operation mode dip switch in Stop.

The program in the PLC must be same to that in the project to convert to Debug mode.

If changed from Stop to Run mode, a dialog box confirms the program conversion to an executable code inside the PLC. This dialog box may be visible up to 30 seconds according to the program size.

If changed to Run mode, the following dialog box appears while the initialization task is run. After the initialization task is complete or disconnected, the dialog box closes.

If changed to Run or Debug mode, Run or Debug function may not be normal if any error occurs on the PLC. Delete the PLC error first and then change the operation mode.

If Show Message when changing the PLC mode in the Tool > Option > Online is not selected, the confirmation message is not displayed when Mode Change instruction is run.

Compare with PLC

This function is used to compare the project in the PLC to the project open in SoftMaster.

To compare projects, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 To connect to PLC, select Online > Connect.

2 Select Online > Compare with PLC.

3 Select an object to compare and then click Compare.

Page 403: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 405 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Description

Current project Refers to the project open in SoftMaster.

Compare Compares between the selected items.

PLC Refers to the project in the PLC.

ATTENTION

Compare results are displayed on the Result window.

Refer to section on Comparing Projects for details.

Reset PLC

This function is used to reset the PLC. Reset PLC is also possible using the ‘Reset PLC’ dip switch in the CPU module.

Page 404: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

406 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

To reset the PLC, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 To connect to PLC, select Online > Connect.

2 Select Online > Reset PLC.

3 Choose to perform a reset or an overall reset and click OK.

ATTENTION

Reset: when PLC is powered again, it deletes all error/warning information to during power ON. Error/warning may occur again based on the situation.

Overall reset: when PLC is powered again, it clears error/warning information; latch 1 area data, I/O skip, error mask and forced I/O setting area to allow power on.

Beware of the fact that after reset, the PLC is OFF and then ON again.

Page 405: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 407 11/09 Honeywell

Clearing PLC data

It is used to clear user programs, parameters, comments, memory and latch area in PLC.

To delete the saved data and latch area in PLC, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 To connect to PLC, select Online > Connect.

2 Select Online > Clear PLC.

3 Select items to delete and then click Clear to start Clear PLC.

4 Under the Clear Item tab, select items of the project saved in the PLC to be deleted.

5 Click Clear to delete the selected items.

6 Select the Clear Memory tab to clear the selected memory area in the PLC.

Page 406: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

408 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

7

Field Description

List of memory areas to select

Shows the memory areas in PLC. Start/End address to delete can be specified by the user.

Clear Deleted the selected items.

Select All Selects all the memory areas.

Reset All Cancels the selected memory area.

Page 407: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 409 11/09 Honeywell

PLC Information

You can view the information regarding the connected PLC. You can also set the password and the PLC timer on this dialog box.

CPU Information

This function allows checking the detailed information of the PLC CPU.

To check the detailed information of PLC CPU, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 To connect to the PLC, select Online > Connect.

2 Select Online > PLC Information.

3 Select the CPU tab.

Shows the specified details and status of the connected PLC CPU.

4 Click Close to close the dialog box.

Page 408: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

410 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

CPU Performance

SoftMaster enables you to check the scan time of the PLC and memory application status.

To check the scan time and memory application status of PLC, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect.

2 Click Online > PLC Information.

3 Select the Performance tab.

Field Label Description

Scan Time Shows the Maximum/Minimum/Current scan time of the connected PLC. If Fixed Cycle Operation is set in the basic parameter, it displays the fixed cycle.

Page 409: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 411 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Program Memory used

Shows the downloaded programs’ size/ all PLC program areas’ size.

Details Shows the list of programs downloaded on the PLC.

Upload Memory used Shows the downloaded comment’s size/ all PLC comment areas’ size.

Details Shows the list of comments saved in the PLC.

4 Click Details to view details of the Program Memory used.

The list of all saved programs and their size is displayed.

Password

User password can be specified, changed or deleted to protect PLC information.

To assign, change and delete the user password, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 To connect to the PLC, select Online > Connect.

2 Select Online > PLC Information.

3 Select the Password tab.

Page 410: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

412 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Field Description

Current Password Used to enter the password saved in the PLC.

New password Used to enter a new password.

Confirm password Used to enter the New Password again.

Delete Deletes the password of the PLC.

Change Changes the password of the PLC.

Page 411: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 413 11/09 Honeywell

Setting password

To set a new password, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Enter a new password in New Password box.

2 Enter the new password again in the Confirm password box.

3 Click Change to set the new password in PLC.

Changing password

To change an existing password:

Step Action

1 Enter the password saved in PLC in Current Password.

2 Enter a new password in New Password.

3 Enter the new password again in Confirm password.

4 Click Change to change the password of PLC.

Deleting password

To delete an existing password:

Step Action

1 Enter the password saved in PLC in Current Password.

2 Click Clear to delete the PLC password.

Page 412: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

414 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

The password can contain a maximum of eight alphabets. The alphabets can be of upper case or lower case.

Special characters can also be used for password.

On setting a password for the PLC, you are prompted to supply password when attempting to connect to the PLC. Only after authentication of the password, the connection to the PLC is established.

PLC RTC Setting

It helps to set the RTC (Real Time Clock) of the PLC.

To set the RTC of the PLC, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 To connect to PLC, select Online > Connect.

2 Select Online > PLC Information.

3 Select the PLC RTC tab.

Page 413: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 415 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

State Shows PLC timer setting status. If the timer is not specified, PLC time is not read.

Date Displays date.

Time Displays time.

Synchronize PLC with PC clock

Synchronizes date and time between PC and PLC.

Send to PLC Transfers user specified time or synchronized time to PLC.

Page 414: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

416 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

PLC History

It displays the history data of error/warning, Change Mode and Shut down Log saved in PLC.

Error Log

To view the error log, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 To connect to PLC, select Online > Connect.

2 Select Online > PLC History.

3 Select the Error Log tab on PLC History dialog box.

Page 415: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 417 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

List Displays Error Log.

Details/Remedy Displays details of the error selected from the history along with action to rectify the error.

Read All Reads and displays all PLC histories.

Clear all logs Deletes all logs entered.

Update Reads PLC history again.

Save Saves PLC history to a file.

Clear Deletes PLC history.

Close Closes the dialog box.

Mode Log

It shows the Mode Change Log of PLC operation modes. To view the Mode log, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 To connect to PLC, select Online > Connect.

2 Select Online > PLC History.

3 Select the Mode Log tab on PLC History dialog box.

Page 416: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

418 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Shut down Log

It shows the Shut down Log history of PLC. To view the Shut down log, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 To connect to PLC, select Online > Connect.

2 Select Online > PLC History.

3 Select the Shut Down Log tab on the PLC History dialog box.

Page 417: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 419 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

ATTENTION

The shut down Log also displays the Base number where power shut down occurred.

System Log

It shows the history of tasks run by SoftMaster when the PLC is running. To view the System log, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 To connect to PLC, select Online > Connect.

Page 418: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

420 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

2 Select Online > PLC History.

3 Select the System Log tab on the PLC History dialog box.

ATTENTION

History data is arranged in chronological sequence.

The history is saved in a “.csv” file. This file can be open in MS Excel or other String editing programs.

Double-click the first column of the list to change sequence in ascending/descending order.

A maximum of 100 history data are displayed. Click Read All to read more PLC histories. If the number of items in history is less than 100, the Read All is disabled.

Page 419: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 421 11/09 Honeywell

PLC Error/Warning

You can check the error/warning and previous Error Log currently saved in PLC. To check the error/warning and previous error logs in the PLC, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 To connect to PLC, select Online > Connect.

2 Select Online > PLC Errors/Warnings….

Page 420: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

422 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

In case of an error/warning during connection or Online, the Error/Warning dialog box appears.

If the error is an I/O parameter issue, I/O installation error, fuse error, I/O Read/Write error, special communication module error”, the applicable error’s slot information is displayed.

When a “Program Error” (when the PLC mode is changed from Stop to Run) or “Execution Program Error” (when PLC is in Run mode) occurs, if the SM project and the downloaded PLC program are same, then double-click the area of program name to move to the corresponding step in the program.

Flash Memory Setting

Flash memory operation of PLC can be configured using SoftMaster. When the operation mode of the PLC mode changes to RUN, it runs the program after copying the program in the flash memory to the program memory. In other words, it runs the PLC from the program in the flash memory.

PLC operation in Run mode

PLC operation in RUN mode refers to the operation mode changes from STOP to RUN, and that the operation mode is Run when PLC is powered back ON.

Page 421: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 423 11/09 Honeywell

To view or change the flash memory settings, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 To connect to PLC, select Online > Connect.

2 Select Online > Set Flash Memory.

Field Label Description

Enable flash memory run mode

Program is run from Flash memory.

Disable flash memory run mode

Cancels the flash memory’s operation mode.

Page 422: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

424 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

If a flash memory operation mode is specified, the program is copied to the flash memory after Program Write or Modification Write during Run.

The flash memory operation mode setting is configured to recover the program when PLC status is in error.

Page 423: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 425 11/09 Honeywell

Force I/O Setting

Force I/O of the I/O refresh area can be specified in PLC. To specify a forced I/O and I/O refresh area in PLC:

Step Action

1 Select Online > Force I/O.

2

Field Label Description

Module address Used to select an address by using base, slot selection box.

Forced Input Used to enable/disable Forced Input. Forced input value per bit is applicable only when the Forced Input is allowed.

Page 424: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

426 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Forced Output Used to enable/disable Forced Output. Forced output value per bit is applicable only when the Forced Output is allowed.

Apply Saves the changed items in the PLC without closing the dialog box.

Forced I/O Used to specify the flag and data for each bit.

Setting address list Displays the address with the Forced I/O flag or data specified.

Delete Deletes the flag and data specified in the selected address from the specified address list.

Variable Names Displays the list of variable/comment).

Delete All Used to cancel the specified flag and data for all areas.

Select All Used to specify the flag and data for all areas.

OK Applies the changed items and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

ATTENTION

Obtaining Forced I/O information, takes around 5 sec. at a speed of 115200bps with RS-232C connected, or about 1 sec. with USB.

The flag displays the Forced I/O application status for each bit. If the flag is selected, it means Enable, and if the flag is not selected, it means Disable.

The data displays the forced value. If selected, 1 is the forced value,

Page 425: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 427 11/09 Honeywell

and if not, 0 is the forced value. However, it is effective only when the flag is in Enable status.

Flag Data Forced Value

0 (not selected) 0 (not selected) X

0 (not selected) 1 (selected) X

1 (selected) 0 (not selected) 0

1 (selected) 1 (selected) 1

Clicking Variable Names displays variables declared on I and Q Address.

In case of an output module having less than 64-channels, you can specify the flag and data up to 64 channels.

Force I/O Setting

(Example: the 4th bit of Base 0, Slot 0 forced to output value 1, 8th bit to output value 0)

Step Action

1 Select base 0 and slot 0.

Page 426: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

428 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

2 Select the flag and data of the bit 3. %QW0.0.0 is registered to the established Address.

Page 427: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 429 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 Select the flag of the bit 7. As the forced output value of the bit 7 is 0, no data needs to be selected. Since %QW0.0.0 is already registered in the pre-set Address, it is not added again.

Page 428: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

430 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

4 Select the Forced Output Enable Flag and then click Apply to apply the forced value.

Page 429: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 431 11/09 Honeywell

Forced I/O Cancel

(Example: the 4th, 8th bit of Base0, Slot 0 forced value to cancel)

Step Action

1 Move to %QW0.0.0. Use the button or directly enter the area to move to.

2 Click the bit 3 and 7’s flag to cancel the forced output value

Page 430: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

432 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

3 Click Apply.

ATTENTION

In program monitoring, the following are applicable:

In the case of forced input, monitoring is displayed with the forced value since the forced input value is updated in the monitor area.

In the case of forced output, monitoring is not displayed since the forced value is actually output regardless of the calculation result.

Page 431: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 433 11/09 Honeywell

Skip I/O setting

Skip is used to enable or disable IO Slots during the PLC operation.

To skip I/O during a PLC operation, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Online > Skip I/O.

2

3

Field Label Description

Base Skip I/O If the base module is skipped, all slots in the base are I/O skipped.

Slot Skip I/O Used to skip a particular IO.

Show Existing Base Only

Shows existing base only

Details Displays detailed information of the special module or the communication module only.

OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

Page 432: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

434 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Skip I/O Setting for each slot

To skip I/O setting for each slot, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the base with the slot to specify Skip I/O.

2 Select the slot to specify the Skip I/O.

3 Select the check box corresponding to the module. Observe that ‘*’ appears beside the base.

4 Click OK. The changed items are displayed.

Page 433: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 435 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

5 Click Yes to display the changed items.

Skip I/O Cancel for each slot

To cancel skip I/O for a slot, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the base to cancel the Skip I/O.

2 Select the slot to cancel the Skip I/O.

3 Clear the check box corresponding to the module. Observe that the ‘*’mark beside the base disappears if there is no slot where Skip I/O is specified in the applicable base.

Page 434: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

436 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Base Skip I/O Setting

To set base skip I/O, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the base to specify the base Skip I/O.

2 Select the check box corresponding to the module.

Page 435: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 437 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 Click OK. The changed items are displayed.

Page 436: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

438 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

4 Click Yes to display changed items.

Page 437: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 439 11/09 Honeywell

Base Skip I/O cancel

To cancel the base skip I/O:

Step Action

1 Select the base to cancel the base Skip I/O.

2 Clear the check box corresponding to the selected module. As the base Skip I/O is canceled, the Skip I/O for each slot can be specified or canceled.

Page 438: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

440 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

3 Click OK to apply the specified Skip I/O.

Page 439: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 441 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

4 Click Yes to display the changed items.

Page 440: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

442 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Fault Mask

It is used to configure whether the module must be run in Fault during PLC operation.

To view fault mask setting, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Online > Fault Mask.

Field Label Description

Base Fault Mask If the base module’s mask is specified, all slots in the base are of the fault mask.

Slot Fault Mask Used to apply the fault mask for each slot or not.

Show Existing Base Only Shows existing base only.

Details Displays detailed information about the special module or the

Page 441: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 443 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

communication module.

OK Applies the changed items and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

ATTENTION

Canceling the Fault Mask specified is identical as described in Skip I/O setting. Refer to section on Skip I/O setting for details.

Page 442: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.2. Online Functions

444 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

The I/O Information dialog box which is similar to Fault Mask or I/O skip dialog box when Online > I/O Information is selected. I/O Sync. It is activated only when the PLC is in STOP Mode.

Clicking I/O Sync synchronizes the I/O Parameter of SoftMaster project with the real module installation information. Please be careful since the previous I/O parameter is erased.

Page 443: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.3. Module Changing Wizard

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 445 11/09 Honeywell

11.3 Module Changing Wizard This Wizard is used to change the module while the PLC is in RUN mode. To change the module during PLC operation, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Online > Module Changing Wizard.

Field Label Description

Comment Displays the comment of the module selection stage.

Base Module Tree Displays the base module.

Slot Modules List Displays the information of the slot installed on the base module.

Back It is inactive at the module selection stage.

Next Used to move to the module confirming stage. It is active only if the module to change is selected.

Cancel Finishes the Module Changing Wizard.

Page 444: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.3. Module Changing Wizard

446 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

2 Select the module to change at the module selection stage and then click Next.

Field Label Description

Comment Displays the comment of the module confirming stage.

Module Information Displays detailed information on the selected module.

Back Used to move to the module selection stage.

Next Used to move to the Removing Module.

Cancel Closes the ‘Module Changing Wizard’.

3 Check the module to change at the module confirming stage.

4 Click Next if the information displayed is identical to the module to change, or click Back to go back to the previous stage. In order to cancel the Module Changing Wizard, click Cancel.

Page 445: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.3. Module Changing Wizard

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 447 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

Comment Displays the comment of the Removing Module.

Back Used to move to the confirming stage of the module removal.

Next Used to move to the module installation stage.

Cancel Closes the Module Changing Wizard.

5 Remove the module physically.

6 After removing the module, click Next. Or click Back to move back to the previous stage. Or click Cancel to cancel the Module Changing Wizard.

7 Install the module at the module installation stage.

Page 446: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.3. Module Changing Wizard

448 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Field Label Description

Description Displays the comment of the module change complete stage.

Back It is inactive since going back to previous stage is unavailable after the module changed.

Finish Finishes the Module Changing Wizard.

8 After inserting the module, click Next. Or click Back to move back to the previous stage. Or click Cancel to cancel the Module Changing Wizard.

9 Close the Module Changing Wizard.

Page 447: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

11. Online 11.3. Module Changing Wizard

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 449 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

During Module removal using the wizard, if the module is not removed, an error message appears on the dialog box.

During Module installation using the wizard, if the module is not installed, an error message appears on the dialog box.

ATTENTION

If the Module Changing Wizard is cancelled, Fault Mask and Skip I/O may continue to be active. Activate the Fault mask and Skip I/O to make the module operate again.

ATTENTION

To change the module without using the Wizard, perform the following steps:

1. Set the Skip I/O for the module to change.

2. Set the Fault Mask for the module to change.

3. Remove the module from the PLC.

4. Install a new module.

5. Release the Skip I/O for the applicable module.

6. Select Online > PLC Error/Warning to check for any error on the applicable module.

7. If no error found on the applicable module, release the Fault Mask for the module.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL

For additional information on Skip I/O and Fault Mask specified for the module, see section on Skip I/O and Fault Mask.

Page 448: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7
Page 449: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 451 11/09 Honeywell

12. Monitoring

12.1 Monitoring SoftMaster’s monitoring functions include in common (Start/Stop Monitoring, Pause, Resume, Pausing Conditions, and Change Current Value).

Start/Stop Monitoring

To start/stop monitoring, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Online > Connect for on-line connection to PLC.

2 Select Monitor > Start Monitoring to start monitoring. Select Monitor > Stop Monitoring to stop monitoring.

3 If LD or IL program is active, it goes to monitoring mode.

ATTENTION

When monitoring starts, correct value may not be monitored if PLC program and SoftMaster program are different.

Change Current Value

Selected Address’s current value or Forced I/O setting can be changed during monitoring

To change current value for a selected Address, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Online > Connect for on-line connection to PLC.

2 Select Monitor > Start Monitoring to start monitoring.

3 Select address or variable on the program or variable monitoring window.

Page 450: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.1. Monitoring

452 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

4 On the menu, select Monitor > Change Current Value.

Field Label Description

Address Name of the variable where current value is changed.

Type Type of the variable where current value is changed.

Range Available range of current value to input based on type.

Page 451: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.1. Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 453 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Value On/Off Device On/Off specified if its type is BOOL.

Value Variable value specified if its type is not BOOL.

Forced I/O▼ Forced I/O setting available if variable is I/Q area and BOOL type.

Flag It is used for Forced I/O setting.

OK It is used to transfer setting value to PLC.

Data Forced I/O data value is specified.

5 Enter Current Value in dialog box and click OK to change the current value.

ATTENTION

1. The default value is displayed based on the variable’s display type. In other words, if it is displayed in hexadecimal when monitored, current value changed is in hexadecimal too.

2. The value may not be entered according to its display type. In other words, if displayed in hexadecimal, it can be entered as unsigned decimal.

3. When you click OK, an error may occur due to ineffective input value or range exceedance.

4. Hexadecimal input starts with “16#” shown in “16#1234”.

5. As for String type, current value (String) is entered between single quotation marks such as (‘abcde’).

6. In case of WSTRING Type, enter the current value (string) between double quotation marks (“abcde”).

7. Only if variable is I/Q address and BOOL type, compulsory I/O is active.

8. If Forced I/O is inactive, edit box of current value and ON/OFF setting is inactive.

9. Change Current Value and Forced I/O Setting are not run at a time.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL

For additional information on Forced I/O Setting, refer section on Force I/O Setting.

Page 452: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.1. Monitoring

454 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Pause/Restart Monitoring

You can pause and restart monitoring.

Pause Monitoring

To pause monitoring, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Online > Connect for on-line connection to PLC.

2 Select Monitor > Start Monitoring to start monitoring.

3 Select Monitor > Pause to stop monitoring momentarily.

Restart Monitoring

To restart monitoring, perform the following steps:

Select Monitor > Resume to restart monitoring.

ATTENTION

PLC is in RUN mode, even if monitoring is momentarily stopped.

You can only restart paused monitoring.

Monitoring value is not renewed if the program screen is moved with Pause Monitoring.

If the current value is changed with Pause Monitoring, the PLC value changes but monitoring value of program screen is not renewed.

Pausing Conditions

If a specified address meets the set conditions, monitoring is paused.

To set the pausing conditions, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Monitor > Pausing Conditions.

2 Specify address on dialog box of Pausing Conditions.

Page 453: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.1. Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 455 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

Select All Used to check all items with no error to allow on the list.

Use Used to check setting status of Pause Monitoring.

Program Selects a program name

Reset All Used to cancel all the selected items allowed.

Variable Used to enter variable name to stop monitoring momentarily

Condition Used to select conditions to stop monitoring momentarily.

Set value Used to enter condition value to stop monitoring momentarily.

Type Displays a variable type

Comment Used to display description declared in variable.

Find Used to find the variable to stop monitoring momentarily on Variable list of a selected program.

OK Used to save changed details and close dialog box.

Cancel Used to close dialog box without saving changed details

3 Click OK to save details.

Page 454: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.1. Monitoring

456 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

A maximum of ten conditions can be set to pause Monitoring

Items in error are not saved on clicking OK.

Errors are displayed in pink.

String type does not support the function of Pause Monitoring.

Among 5 conditions [==, >, <, >=, <=] available for Pause Monitoring, one can be selected.

Page 455: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.2. LD Program Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 457 11/09 Honeywell

12.2 LD Program Monitoring When the SoftMaster is in monitoring mode, it displays contact points prepared in the Ladder program (normally open contact point, normally closed contact point, Positive transition pulse contact point, Negative transition pulse contact point), coils (coil, reverse-coil, set coil, reset coil, Positive transition pulse coil, Negative transition pulse coil) and function(block) I/O parameter’s current value.

To start monitoring, perform the following steps

Step Action

1 Select Monitor > Start/Stop Monitoring.

2 LD program changes to monitoring mode.

3 Select Monitor > Change Current Value to change current value.

Monitor display of contact point

1. Normally open contact point: If an applicable contact point’s value is On status, address (or variable) value is displayed in red, and the power flow inside the contact point in blue.

Page 456: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.2. LD Program Monitoring

458 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

Monitor-related colors indicated in this manual are the default colors of SoftMaster. Applicable colors may be changed from menu Tools > Options. Refer section on Basic Application for more details on the option item.

2. Normally closed contact point: If applicable contact point’s value is On status, address value is displayed in red, and the power flow inside the contact point is not displayed.

3. Normally transition pulse contact point: displayed similar to as normally open contact point.

4. Normally transition pulse contact point: displayed similar to as normally closed contact point.

Coil Monitor Display

1. Coil: If applicable coil’s value is On status, address (or variable) value is displayed in red, and the power flow inside the coil in blue.

2. Reverse-coil: If applicable coil’s value is On status, address (or variable) value is displayed in red, and the power flow inside the coil is not displayed.

3. Set coil: displayed similar to coil.

4. Reset coil: displayed as similar to (negative) coil.

5. Positive transition pulse coil: displayed as similar to coil.

6. Negative transition pulse coil: displayed as similar to coil.

Page 457: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.2. LD Program Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 459 11/09 Honeywell

Monitor Display of Function (Block)

Monitoring value is displayed on the IO parameter of the function (block). The data of the function (block) IO parameter is displayed based on the monitoring display format.

ATTENTION

Data Display can be customized using Tools > Options > Online. Refer section on Basic Application for details.

Start/Stop monitoring

Stop monitoring

Select Monitor > Start/Stop Monitoring.

ATTENTION

When monitoring, all types of Edit is unavailable except Modification during Run Mode.

When monitoring starts and stops, LD diagram height changes to display application instruction’s current value, which takes some time according to the size of prepared program.

Page 458: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.3. Variable Monitoring

460 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

12.3 Variable Monitoring Monitoring is available through specific registered variables.

Variable Monitoring Window

Field Label Description

PLC Used to display PLC available for registration. A SoftMaster project may be composed of multi-PLC. Accordingly, it can be displayed on the variable monitoring window.

Program Used to select a program name with a variable to register.

Variable Name/ Address

Used to enter the name of a variable or address.

Value Used to display applicable address value when monitored. The value can be changed through Change Current Value of monitoring.

Type Displays the type of a variable.

Address/Variable Name

Press Enter or double-click an assigned address or variable name to select a variable on the list of local variable if memory is allocated.

Comment Comment: displays the variable comment.

Error Display Error Display: Error is displayed in red.

Error Type Error type

In case one of PLC name, address and Type is not entered.

In case of incorrect address.

Page 459: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.3. Variable Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 461 11/09 Honeywell

Field Label Description

In case there is no program name or there is no program in the PLC.

In case the address type is not supported or PLC name unavailable.

ATTENTION

The areas of type, address/variable and comment column cannot be edited by user.

4 variable monitoring tabs cannot be monitored at the same time.

The number of addresses available to register in variable monitoring is unlimited.

Only the part displayed on the screen is monitored.

The larger the number of addresses, the longer the monitoring refresh takes.

Even if not in monitoring mode, refresh is available on variable monitoring.

Registering Variable/Comment

Monitoring items can be registered on Local Variable list on the variable monitoring windows

To register in variable/comment, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the monitoring window, right-click and select Register in Variable/Comment from the context menu.

Page 460: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.3. Variable Monitoring

462 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

2 The Select dialog box appears if two or more PLCs are included in the project or if two or more programs are included in a PLC. Select the PLC and program to register.

3 Click OK. The Select Variable window is displayed.

Page 461: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.3. Variable Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 463 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

Variable Used to enter variable names to find.

Variable type Displays variables by types.

Variable List Used to display the list of variables.

OK Used to register selected items on the variable monitoring windows.

Page 462: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.3. Variable Monitoring

464 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

You can select one or more items on Select Variable/Address dialog box.

The selected item is added in the last line of the variable monitoring windows.

An item same as a previously registered item can be also registered.

Register All

You can register all direct variables at the same time. To register all variables, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the variable monitoring window, right-click the mouse and select Register All from the context menu.

2 Select dialog box appears if two or more PLCs are included in the project. Select a PLC and program to register.

Page 463: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.3. Variable Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 465 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 Register All dialog box appears.

Field label Description

Start Address Used to input start address of the address to register. (Address Ex: IX0.0.0, QB1.2.0. MW12…)

Count Used to enter the number of registers.

4 The variable registration screen is displayed as in the following figure.

Page 464: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.3. Variable Monitoring

466 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

ATTENTION

A maximum of 100 variables can be registered at a time.

The item to register is added at the last line of the variable monitoring window.

Register by user

The user can directly enter items to register on the variable monitoring window. You can directly edit the PLC, Program and Variable/Address Column.

ATTENTION

Copy, Paste, Cut and Delete functions are provided.

Copy: available in String format on the variable monitoring windows. Paste is available for Excel and other String editors.

Paste: Paste is available for variable monitoring after Copy from Excel or other String editors.

Delete: used to delete the selected row. Delete is also applicable for several selected rows.

Undo or Redo functions are not supported.

Page 465: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.3. Variable Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 467 11/09 Honeywell

Drag and Drop Register from other windows

The user can select contact point, coil, variable, etc. from other windows (LD, Variable/Comment windows) to drag and drop on the variable monitoring window for registering.

To drag and drop area to register from other windows, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the area from other windows (LD, SFC, Variable/Comment windows) to register on the variable monitoring.

Area to register onto the variable monitoring from LD window – Red Edge.

Area to register variable monitor in the SFC window.

Area to register onto the variable monitoring window from Variable/Comment window.

Page 466: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.3. Variable Monitoring

468 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

2 Move to the variable monitoring window keeping the mouse’s left button pressed on the selected area.

Cursor shape and input image is created if the mouse is moved onto the variable monitoring window as shown in the following figure.

3 Release the left button of the mouse after positioning on the row of the variable monitoring window to insert the selected items.

4 The selected items are registered on the variable monitoring window as shown in the following figure.

ATTENTION

The variable registering time is directly proportional to the number of variables to be registered

There is no limit on the number of variables that can be registered.

Items inserted in the middle of rows, are registered between rows.

With the mouse’s left button still pressed, move onto variable monitoring number tabs (Monitoring 1, Monitoring 2, Monitoring 3 and Monitoring 4) to register on the applicable variable monitoring tabs.

Page 467: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.3. Variable Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 469 11/09 Honeywell

View Detailed/Briefly

It is a helpful function to view as many variables as possible on the screen of the variable monitoring window.

To view Detailed/briefly, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the variable monitoring window, select Briefly from the right-click menu.

2 It is displayed as follows.

Only the columns of variable/address and value are displayed.

3 Select Detailed again to display the following figure containing many a row.

ATTENTION

Selecting Briefly hides the PLC, Program, Type, Address/Variable and Comment columns.

Even when in Brief View mode, the hidden columns can be viewed through View function.

The number of rows is decided by the size of the variable monitoring window.

In Brief View mode, the number of rows change if the size of the Variable Monitoring Window changes.

Even if in Brief View mode, Register, Delete and Edit functions are all available (However, Undo & Redo functions are not supported).

Tool tips display PLC, Type and Address only. However, the variable if declared is also displayed.

Page 468: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.3. Variable Monitoring

470 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

View options

The user can select specific columns.

To view a selected function, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the variable monitoring window, select View Option > Column Name (PLC, Program, Variable/Address, Value, Address/Variable, Comment) from the right-click menu.

2 To hide the selected column, select the same menu again from the right click menu.

Page 469: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.3. Variable Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 471 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

By default, all view option columns are displayed.

This function is also available in Detailed View mode.

The value column does not support Hide function.

If converted to Detailed or Brief View mode, hidden columns are displayed by default.

String in the hidden columns cannot be copied and pasted in other editors.

Display

Display of the monitoring value of the address registered on the variable monitoring can be changed.

To change the display type of an address, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the variable monitoring window, select Unsigned Decimal, Signed Decimal, Hexadecimal and String from the right click context menu.

2 Display type of the selected address changes.

ATTENTION

BOOL type if viewed in unsigned decimal is displayed “On/Off”.

Hexadecimal is displayed with small letter prefix ‘16#’ as shown in “16#h10AC”.

String is displayed in “” for example, “adcd”.

Can be set different type than defied in the monitoring option for LD

Display menus are active or inactive based on available display type.

Page 470: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.3. Variable Monitoring

472 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Monitoring operations

Start Monitoring

It is used to begin monitoring of the registered addresses on the variable monitoring window.

To start monitoring, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Monitor > Start/Stop Monitoring.

2 The item with identical Start Monitoring PLC name and the item with no error execute Monitoring.

Variable Monitoring Window In monitoring mode.

ATTENTION

PLC’s address value is not displayed if not monitored.

Any item with error is not monitored.

Edit, Add and Delete are available even during monitoring.

Change Current Value

Current value of the address can be changed in the monitoring mode.

To change the current value of the address in monitoring mode, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Monitor > Start/Stop Monitoring.

2 Select Address.

3 On the menu, select Monitor > Change Current Value. Or double-click the

Page 471: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.3. Variable Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 473 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

value cell of the address selected on the variable monitoring window, or press Enter.

4 Change Current Value Dialog box appears, enabling you to directly enter the current value.

5 Click OK to transfer the setting value to the PLC.

Find

Find

It helps to find a string based on the classification by capital/small letter.

ATTENTION

Find and Replace function is not available on the variable monitoring window.

Value is regarded as a string not as a figure when Find function is run in the value column.

Find Again

It is used to find the string found before once again. Initiate the Find command on the program or Variable/Comment, and then initiate Find Again on the variable monitoring to start find.

Print

It prints the current active variable monitoring tab contents.

ATTENTION

Hidden columns are not printed.

Print Preview function is not available.

Page 472: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.3. Variable Monitoring

474 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Shortcut Keys

All the operations are available with shortcut keys on the menu.

ATTENTION

Some shortcut keys are preconfigured and cannot be changed.

Shortcut Keys Details

Home/End On the variable monitoring window, select a cell to edit the cell (PLC, Address, Type Column), where edit option is available.

Ctrl+Home/End Moves to the first or the last cell.

Ctrl+Arrow Moves from the currently selected cell to the first or the last cell to the left or right, above or below.

Tab Moves the current cell from the left to the right.

Shift+Tab Moves the current cell from the right to the left.

Enter Moves the current cell from above to below. If the current cell is value column during monitoring, it changes the current value too. If the current cell is variable column, it registers on Variable/Comment.

Shift+Enter Moves the current cell up.

Alignment

Alignment can be changed to ascending or descending sequence.

To change the alignment, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Double-click on the header of the column to align.

2 Alignment changes to ascending or descending sequence.

Page 473: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.3. Variable Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 475 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 After alignment, an arrow figure indicates the sequence as ascending or descending.

ATTENTION

If aligned in descending sequence, a downward arrow is displayed. An upward arrow indicates the ascending sequence.

By default, it is not aligned when the project is opened.

If aligned once more in descending sequence, it is aligned in ascending sequence.

Alignment for row is not available.

Page 474: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.4. System Monitoring

476 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

12.4 System Monitoring System Monitoring is used to display the PLC’s slot information, assigned I/O information, Module status, and data value.

Basic Application

System Monitoring can be initiated in the following two ways:

On the SoftMaster menu, select Monitor > System Monitoring.

On the Start menu, select Start > Program >SoftMaster > System Monitoring.

The Module Information window displays the information of the PLC slot. After reading the module information saved in the PLC, it displays it on the data display screen of the module information window.

Select one of the following options view the Base.

Step Action

1 Select items on the module information window. (Ex. Base 0, Base 1, …)

2 Select Base items. (Select First, Previous, Next, Last base)

Page 475: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.4. System Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 477 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 Use the direction key on the keyboard to position the module’s cursor on the base to select.

ATTENTION

To start System Monitoring, the SoftMaster must be Online with the PLC and the Monitoring must be ON.

Connect/Disconnect

System Monitoring is initiated from SoftMaster; it can also be initiated independently.

Thus, the connection is available to PLC with Connect options. If connected with PLC, base information is read from PLC to display on the module information window.

To Connect/Disconnect system monitoring to PLC, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Specify Connect options.

2 Confirm that the cable is installed as applicable to the connection method.

3 Select PLC > Connect to connect.

4 Select PLC > Disconnect to disconnect.

ATTENTION

System Monitoring when initiated connects to the saved Connect options.

If run in SoftMaster, it connects to SoftMaster’s Connect options.

Default of Base 0 is displayed on the screen.

System Synchronization

It reads base information, I/O assignment method and slot information specified in the PLC to display on the screen. When monitored, it reads I/O skip information and forced I/O input/output information to change the current value.

Page 476: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.4. System Monitoring

478 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

For system synchronization, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.

2 Select PLC > System Synchronization.

ATTENTION

Executing system synchronization updates the module information only.

Refer to Basic Parameter Information for details on I/0 assignment method.

All I/O modules ON/OFF

It is used to check output value of all the I/O modules on the PLC.

All I/O modules ON

It turn the data value of all the I/O modules on the PLC as ON.

To turn ON the data modules

Step Action

1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.

2 Select PLC > All I/O modules ON.

All I/O modules OFF

It makes the data value of all the I/O modules on the PLC as OFF.

To turn OFF all I/O modules, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.

2 Select PLC > All I/O modules OFF.

Page 477: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.4. System Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 479 11/09 Honeywell

Selected I/O modules ON/OFF

It is used to check the output value of the selected I/O modules on the PLC.

Selected I/O module ON

All IOs selected are forced to ON.

To turn ON a selected I/O module, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.

2 Select PLC > Selected I/O modules ON.

Selected I/O module OFF

All I/Os selected are forced to OFF.

To turn OFF a selected I/O module, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.

2 Select PLC > Selected I/O modules OFF.

Change Current Value

To change the current value, the SoftMaster must be connected to the PLC and be in the monitoring mode. Click the contact point to change the data value of the selected contact point to ON or OFF.

To change the current value of a selected contact point, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Ensure that the PLC is online and the monitoring mode is enabled.

2 Position the mouse cursor on the I/O module’s contact point to change the cursor to hand shape.

3 Click the I/O module’s contact point.

Page 478: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.4. System Monitoring

480 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

Move the mouse to the I/O contact point to display the assigned address on the status bar (located on the bottom-right of the window).

If I/O skip is specified, it is always displayed as OFF.

Information Display of Power Module

Information of Power Module displays base power shutdown history including date, time and details in which power shutdown bases are displayed.

Page 479: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.4. System Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 481 11/09 Honeywell

To display the information of a power module, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.

2 Select one of the following methods to display module information:

Select the Power Module and on the menu, select PLC > Module Info.

Select the Power Module and select Module Info. from the right-click context menu.

Select the Power Module on the screen and press Enter.

Select and double-click on the Power Module displayed on the screen.

ATTENTION

A maximum of 100 power shutdowns are displayed on the screen.

No module information is available for empty slots and I/O modules.

Page 480: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.4. System Monitoring

482 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Information Display of CPU module

Information of CPU Module displays the CPU version, type, operation mode, key status, CPU status, connection status, mode conversion source, forced I/O setting status, I/O skip and Fault mask status.

To display the information of a CPU module, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.

2 Select one of the following methods to display the CPU module information.

Select the CPU Module and select PLC > Module Info.

Select and right-click on the CPU Module and select CPU Module Info. from the context menu

Select the CPU Module on the Module Information window, and right click to select CPU Module Info. on the context menu.

Select the CPU Module on the screen and press Enter.

Double-click on the CPU Module displayed on the screen.

Page 481: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.4. System Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 483 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Information Display of Communication Module

Information of Communication Module displays module type, operation mode, hardware error & hardware version, O/S version and its installed date.

Page 482: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.4. System Monitoring

484 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

To display the information of a communication module, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.

2 Select one method among those below to display the COM module information.

With Communication Module selected, on the menu, select PLC > Module Info.

With Communication Module selected, right-click the mouse to select COM Module Info. on the menu.

With Communication Module selected on the Module Information window, right-click the mouse to select Connection Module Info. on the menu.

If Communication Module is selected on the screen, press Enter.

Double-click the mouse positioned on Communication Module displayed on the screen.

Page 483: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.4. System Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 485 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Page 484: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.4. System Monitoring

486 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Viewing Information of Special Modules

Information of Special Module displays the module name, O/S version & date and module status.

To display the information of a special module, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.

2 Select one of the following methods to display special module information:

Select the Special Module and select PLC > Module Information.

Select the Special Module and select Special Module Info. from the right-click context menu.

Select a Special Module on the Module Information window and choose Special Module Info. from the right-click context menu.

Select a Special Module on the screen and press Enter.

Double-click a Special Module displayed on the screen.

Page 485: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.4. System Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 487 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Classification Description

Module name Provides special module’s type and its detailed information.

O/S version Provides special module’s installed O/S version information, which is used for upgrading module O/S later.

O/S date Provides special module’s latest O/S updated date information.

Module status Provides special module’s current status (error code) information.

Page 486: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.4. System Monitoring

488 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Start/Stop Monitoring

It reads PLC’s I/O data to display on the screen.

Start Monitoring

To start monitoring, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.

2 Select PLC > Start Monitoring.

Stop Monitoring

To stop monitoring, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.

2 Select PLC > Stop Monitoring.

Special Module Monitoring

It initiates monitoring the special module (A/D module, D/A module, HS counter module).

To run special module monitoring, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.

2 Select PLC > Special Module Monitoring.

Page 487: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.4. System Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 489 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Page 488: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.4. System Monitoring

490 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

Positioning module does not support PLC's module monitoring

Positioning module’s monitoring function is installed along with its exclusive software to monitor.

Save

It is used to save the system information and data currently displayed on the screen.

To save the data and system information, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select File > Save.

2 Select File > Save As to save the data as a different name.

ATTENTION

File extension is set as (.smi).

Open

It is used to read the system information file previously saved.

To open a file:

Disconnect from PLC.

Select File > Open.

Double-click an applicable file name.

Drag & drop the file onto the System Monitoring to open it.

Page 489: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.4. System Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 491 11/09 Honeywell

Navigate Base

It selects a base to show its module information.

To navigate the first, previous, next and last base, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Navigate to the first base.

On the menu, select Base > First Base.

2 Navigate to the previous base.

On the menu, select Base > Previous Base.

3 Navigate to the next base.

On the menu, select Base > Next Base.

4 Navigate to the last base.

On the menu, select Base > Last Base.

Print Preview

This function is used to see a print preview of system monitoring.

On the Preview window, the user can modify the area to be printed.

For a preview before printing, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select PLC>Disconnect.

2 On the System Monitoring window, select File > Preview on the menu.

3 Modify the area of the image displayed.

4 Move the mouse to the edge.

5 Mouse cursor changes.

6 Move the mouse while being clicked to modify the size.

Page 490: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.4. System Monitoring

492 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

ATTENTION

The specified area of Preview is saved.

In monitoring mode, Preview is not available.

Page 491: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 493 11/09 Honeywell

12.5 Address Monitoring Address Monitoring enables the monitoring of all the address areas’ data in the PLC.

It can write or read data value on the PLC’s specific address. In addition, Address Monitoring can display the data value continuously when displayed or entered on the screen depending on the bit format and display method.

Basic Application

Address Monitoring is performed by the following two ways:

On the SoftMaster menu, select Monitor > Address Monitoring.

On the Start menu, select Program > SoftMaster > Address Monitoring.

The Address information window displays all the address areas in the PLC, based on CPU type.

Double-click the address icon (Ex. I. Q, M, R, W) or right-click on the Address Tree window and choose Open Address from the context menu.

Page 492: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

494 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

To start Address monitoring, SoftMaster must be Online with PLC and the Monitoring must be ON.

If Monitoring mode is OFF, the address displays the previous data value. The data value is initialized to 0.

Address Areas

Address Areas are necessary for effective and correct control of various types of data. PLC provides various address areas of data to manage such data effectively.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL

For additional information on the respective detailed address area, see 2MLI CPUU User’s Guide.

Data Format and Display Items

Data is displayed on the screen in the following ways:

Display Setting Description

Data Size 1 bit, 8 bits, 16 bits, 32 bits and 64 bits

Display Format Binary, BCD, Unsigned decimal, Signed decimal, Hexadecimal, Real, String

1 bit, 8 bit, 16 bit, 32 bit, and 64 bit

Data size of the address is displayed in 1 bit 1 bit, 8 bit, 16 bit, 32 bit, or 64 bit

To display the data size of the address in 1 bit 1 bit, 8 bit, 16 bit, 32 bit, or 64 bit:

Select View > View Options >1 bit/8 bit/16 bit/32 bit/64 bit from the menu of the Address Monitoring window.

Page 493: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 495 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

The address of a selected cell is displayed in the task bar.

Binary, BCD, Unsigned decimal, signed decimal, hexadecimal, real, and Text

Address data can also be displayed in binary, BCD, unsigned decimal, signed decimal, hexadecimal, real, and text format by choosing the appropriate View option.

Edit Data

Data value is specified to write address data on the PLC, or to write the selected area on the PLC.

Edit Cell

It is used to edit data in the cell.

To edit data in the cell:

Page 494: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

496 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

1 Use the mouse or keyboard to select an optional cell.

2 If in monitoring mode, data can be directly entered in the selected cell. If monitoring is off, double click the bottom right of the cell to open a dialog box to enter the data.

Cut, Copy, Paste, delete data

You can Cut, Copy, Paste, and delete data from the cell. This works like the standard windows functions.

Fill

It is used to fill the selected data.

To fill a selected area:

Step Action

1 Use the mouse to select the cell area to fill automatically.

2 Position the mouse at the end of the cell to make the mouse cursor shaped “+”.

3 Move the mouse with its left button pressed up/down and right/left.

4 Release the left button of the mouse.

Save Address

Use one of the following three methods to save the address.

Save All Address Areas

To save all address areas:

Step Action

1 Select File > Save.

2 Select File > Save As to save the data with a different name.

File extension is set as (.mem).

Page 495: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 497 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Save Respective Address Area

To save a respective address area:

Step Action

1 Select File > Export Address to File.

File extension is set as (address+m). (Ex. iim, iqm, imm,…)

Page 496: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

498 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Save Respective Address Area with all windows closed

To save a respective address area in case of all windows closed:

Step Action

1 Select File > Export Address to File.

2 Select the address to save from the combo box.

File extension is set as (i+device+m). (Ex. iim, iqm, imm,…)

Open Address

Use one of the following three methods available to open an address.

Open All Address Areas

To open all address areas:

Select File > Open.

Page 497: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 499 11/09 Honeywell

Import Address from File

To import an address from file:

On the menu, select File > Import Address from File.

Page 498: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

500 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Open Respective Address Area with all windows closed

To open a respective address area in case of all windows closed:

Step Action

1 Select File > Import Address from File.

2 Select the address to open from the combo box.

ATTENTION

When in monitoring mode, Open and Import Address from File are inactive.

Data Value Setting

Data value of the address is specified according to its display type and the number of bits. In addition, setting area of the data value can be selected.

To set the data value, perform the following steps:

Stop monitoring.

Select Edit > Fill Data Area.

Page 499: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 501 11/09 Honeywell

Page 500: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

502 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Field Label Description

Title bar Used to display the address to set its data value.

Data value Used to input and display the data compatible with the number of bits and the display format.

Bit value Used to decide the size of data.

Setup area Used to decide the range the data value is applied to in the address.

Display Used to decide the input format of data and change the format of the data value according to changed value display if any data value is available.

Page 501: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 503 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

Address name is displayed on the title to display the dialog box for Setting Data Value.

Clear Data

It is used to delete all data values of the address.

To delete all the data values of an address, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Edit > Clear Data.

2 You are prompted to confirm the deletion of all address areas.

Page 502: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

504 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Write to PLC

It is used to transfer the address data saved in on-line computer to PLC.

To write a saved address data to PLC, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Ensure PLC is connected and the monitoring mode is inactive.

2 Select PLC > Write to PLC.

3 Select the address to write on Write dialog box of PLC.

Page 503: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 505 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

Address Area Used to display the list of the addresses to write on PLC.

Select All Used to select all the addresses in the address area.

Unselect All Used to cancel all the addresses selected in the address area.

4 Click OK to write the selected address on the PLC.

ATTENTION

F address’s exclusive Read areas cannot be written on PLC. Exclusive Read areas are based on the type of CPU.

Page 504: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

506 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Read from PLC

It is used to read the address data saved in PLC to on-line computer.

To read a saved address data from PLC, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Ensure PLC is connected and is in the monitoring mode.

2 Select address PLC > Read from PLC.

3 Select the address to read from Read dialog box of PLC.

Field Label Description

Address Area Used to display the list of the addresses to read from PLC.

Select All Used to select all the addresses in the address area.

Unselect All Used to cancel all the addresses selected in the address area.

4 Click OK to read the selected address from the PLC.

Page 505: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 507 11/09 Honeywell

Write Selected Area on PLC

It is used to write the address data in the selected area on PLC connected.

To write the address data of a selected area to PLC, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the area to write on PLC.

2 Select PLC > Write Selected Area to PLC.

3 You are prompted to confirm if you want to write the selected area on PLC.

4 Click OK to write the selected area on PLC.

Start/Stop Monitoring

It reads the address data from PLC to display on the screen in the on-line status, or it stops reading the data.

Start Monitoring

It reads the address data from PLC to display on the screen in the on-line status.

To start monitoring, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.

2 Select PLC > Start Monitoring.

Page 506: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

508 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Stop Monitoring

It stops reading the address data from PLC in the on-line status.

To stop monitoring, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Confirm the connection status with PLC.

2 Select PLC > Stop Monitoring.

ATTENTION

If in monitoring mode, the data cannot be edited.

If in monitoring mode, Write to PLC, Read from PLC, Write Selected Area to PLC are not available.

Change Current Value

It is used to change the data value of the cell in monitoring mode.

To change the data value of a cell in monitoring mode, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Ensure PLC is connected and the monitoring mode is active.

2 Select PLC > Change Current Value.

3 The Change Current Value dialog box is displayed.

Page 507: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 509 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

CellHeading CellHeading

Field Label Description

Address Used to display the start address to change the current value.

Bit number Used to display the number of bits to change the current value.

Usually it is identical to 1, 8, 16, 32 or 64 bits as displayed on the screen.

String format is displayed in 32*8 bits.

Display Used to display the data display format to change the current value.

Set Value Used to display the data value to change the current value.

ATTENTION

If the current value is changed in string display format, the data value of 32-byte area is always changed from the start address.

Page 508: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

510 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

PLC Type Settings

It is used to display the PLC type currently set or to set address data based on the PLC type.

To view or change the PLC type settings:

Select File > PLC Type Settings.

Field Label Description

PLC Type Used to display or change the PLC type currently set.

CPU type Displays the currently set CPU type or changes the CPU type.

ATTENTION

While connected to the PLC, the current PLC type is displayed but is not changeable.

Screen Zoom-In/Zoom-Out

It is used to zoom in or out the size of the screen displayed.

To zoom-in, on the menu, select View > Zoom-In.

To zoom-out, on the menu, select View > Zoom-Out.

Automatic Width/Height Adjustment

This function is used to adjust the size of the data values to display on the screen.

Page 509: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 511 11/09 Honeywell

Width AutoFit adjusts the size to the string length of the cell. Automatic Height Adjustment adjusts the row height to the string height of the cell.

To auto-fit width adjustment, on the menu, select View > Width Auto-Fit.

To auto-fit height adjustment, on the menu, select View > Height Auto-Fit.

View Properties

It is used to change the font and font size of the data value displayed on the screen. In addition, the color of the data value can be changed in the monitoring mode.

To view the properties of data value, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select View > View Properties.

2 Select Font… to change font.

3 Select Color… to change color.

Field Label Description

Font Type, Font size Shows currently displayed font name and font size.

Font Calls a dialog box to change font name and font size displayed on the screen.

Page 510: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

512 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Data value color Displays color of data value currently specified in monitoring mode.

Color Calls a dialog box to change color of data value in monitoring mode.

4 Click OK to apply the newly specified value.

Page Setting

It is used to specify the address page printed. Page margins, title and grid lines can be shown or hidden as necessary. In addition, the sequence of pages to print can be specified with priority of row or column.

To view or change the page settings, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select File > Page Setup.

2 Specify margins.

3 Show or hide title and grid lines as necessary.

4 Specify the sequence of pages to print with priority of row or column.

5 Specify the print type of the center of page, horizontal or vertical.

Page 511: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.5. Address Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 513 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Page 512: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.6. Special Module Monitoring

514 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

12.6 Special Module Monitoring

Step Action

1 From the SoftMaster menu, select Monitor > Special Module Monitoring to display Special Module list.

The following dialog box is displayed. It displays the list of special module currently installed on the PLC system

2 Select a module on the list and click Monitor. The Special Module Monitoring dialog box is displayed as follows.

Page 513: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.6. Special Module Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 515 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

FLAG Monitor (applicable only to HS counter module)

Flag monitoring function is used to run instructions for HS counter module. The user can check the instruction and enter signal status along with HS counter monitoring/test screen as well as Flag monitoring screen displayed at the same

Page 514: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.6. Special Module Monitoring

516 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

time.

Parameter Setting Screen

Parameter setting screen is divided into parameter changing area (setting value) and confirming area (current value) that the changed parameter is successfully transferred to the module during monitoring.

Start Monitoring Click Start Monitoring to start monitoring being displayed on the screen. Click Start Monitoring again to stop monitoring.

Test After changing the parameter at the bottom of the Monitoring/Test screen, click Test Start to begin testing the operation of applicable special module, which directly transfers the parameter information to the module so to display its result on the monitoring screen for the user to confirm.

Contact Point Input Signal Status Screen

The user can confirm HS counter status of input contact point signal (ON/OFF) through the upper of the Flag monitoring screen.

Instruction Screen The user can initiate the instruction for HS counter operation and additional functions at the bottom of the Flag monitoring screen. If the instruction is correctly run, the status of the applicable instruction is displayed as ON/OFF.

3 Through the Monitoring/Test screen, the user can directly change the parameter value saved in the special module while checking the test operation and its status of the applicable module.

ATTENTION

Select the HS counter module on the special module screen to write HS counter Flag monitoring and instruction functions.

Page 515: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.7. Trend Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 517 11/09 Honeywell

12.7 Trend Monitoring Trend monitoring is used to read the data periodically from the PLC connected to display in a graphical format. The trend monitoring window is composed of bit graph and trend graph. In the bit graph, bit address’s On/Off status is displayed in stair-shaped graph. And in the trend graph, the variation trend of the data is displayed with the address value converted from word to data format specified.

Configuring Trend Monitoring

To configure trend monitoring,

Step Action

1 Select Monitoring>Trend Monitoring. Select Graph > Trend Settings.

2

Page 516: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.7. Trend Monitoring

518 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

3

Field Label Description

Frequency Used to specify the cycle to read data from PLC. The shorter the cycle is, the more correct the data is, which may have an influence on PLC scan and PC performance, though.

Address Setting Used to assign the address to monitor. The address can be displayed in bit or in real as specified.

OK Applies the changed items and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

ATTENTION

The Max. samples to display cannot be greater than the Max. sample to keep.

The Max. time to display cannot be greater than the Max. time to keep.

The relationship between the Max. samples to keep and the Max. sample to display is as shown in the following figure. In the following figure, Graph is of the current graph area displayed on the screen, which can be scrolled horizontally as many as the max. samples displayed.

Page 517: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.7. Trend Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 519 11/09 Honeywell

The Max. samples to keep means the max. number of samples available to save on the file.

Start Trend Monitoring

To start trend monitoring, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Connect to the PLC.

2 Select Monitor > Trend Monitoring.

Page 518: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.7. Trend Monitoring

520 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Legend Description

A Bit graph: displays the data of bit address.

B Bit graph index: displays the bit graph and graph colors.

C Bit graph current value: displays the current value of the bit address.

D Trend graph: displays the data of word address.

E Trend graph index: displays the word address and graph colors.

F Trend graph current value: displays the current value of word address.

ATTENTION

The data displayed in the trend monitor may be different with the actual data. In order to monitor accurate timing, please use the data trace function.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL

For information on the data trace function, see section on Data Traces

Setting Bit Address

It is used to enter the bit address to monitor.

To set a bit address, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Monitoring>Trend Monitoring.

2 Select Graph > Trend Settings.

3 Select the bit graph tab on the Trend Setup dialog box.

4 Enter the address of bit type. Or double-click the variable column to select the declared address on the Variable/Comment dialog box.

Page 519: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.7. Trend Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 521 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

A maximum of 8 bit addresses can be registered.

Setting Trend Graph

It is used to set the trend address to monitor.

To set a trend address, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Monitoring>Trend Monitoring.

2 Select Graph > Trend Settings.

3 Select the trend graph tab on the Setting Monitoring dialog box.

4 Enter the address of word type. Or double-click the variable column to select the declared address on the Variable/Comment dialog box.

5 Click the type column to select the data type.

ATTENTION

A maximum of four trend addresses can be registered. Supported data types are as follows:

Type Size Type Size

BIT 1 bit REAL 4 bytes

BYTE 1 byte LREAL 8 bytes

WORD 2 bytes INT 2 bytes

DWORD 4 bytes DINT 4 bytes

LWORD 8 bytes LINT 8 bytes

Page 520: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.7. Trend Monitoring

522 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Setting graph

To view or change graph settings, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Monitoring>Trend Monitoring.

2 Select Graph > Graph Settings…

3

Field Label Description

Show grid Used to decide to show XY grid or not on the screen.

Show X-axis data Used to decide to show X-axis data or not.

Page 521: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.7. Trend Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 523 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

X-axis data option Used to specify the display method of X-axis data.

Minimum value/Maximum value

Used to set the max./min. range of the graph.

Bit graph legend Used to specify the position of bit graph index. No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left Bottom and Right Bottom are available for the Bit Index Position.

Trend graph legend Used to specify the position of trend graph index. No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left Bottom and Right Bottom are available for the Trend Index Position.

Color Used to specify address color of each graph.

OK Applies the changed items and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

ATTENTION

The max./min. value is applied only to Y-axis of the trend graph, and not applied if View Current Y-axis is automatically adjusted.

The min. value input cannot be greater than the max. value.

The actual data’s max./min. value range and specified graph’s max./min. value range are as shown below. Only the range in gray is displayed in the graph.

Page 522: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.7. Trend Monitoring

524 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

If View is not selected in Setting Color, its applicable address is not displayed in the graph.

Graph Color Settings

To change the color of a graph, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the address to change its graph color.

2 Click the color column to display the Color dialog box. On the dialog box, select a color and then click OK.

Page 523: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.7. Trend Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 525 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

View Graph Option Settings

To view graph option settings, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the address to change its Graph Option.

2 Select or cancel the Check Box of View Column.

Page 524: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.7. Trend Monitoring

526 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Setting Graph Window

It is used to decide to change View Graph Option and display the data value as necessary.

To view or change graph window settings:

Step Action

1 Select Monitoring>Trend Monitoring.

2 Select Graph > Graph window Settings.

Field Label Description

View all Displays all the bit and trend graphs.

View bit graph Displays only the bit graph.

View graph value Displays only the bit graph value.

View trend graph value Displays the trend graph value.

Page 525: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.7. Trend Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 527 11/09 Honeywell

Graph function

View Cursor

It is used to display the data value the mouse is positioned on. To view the data value the mouse is positioned on, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Graph > Show Cursor.

2 Click to select the graph. Whenever the mouse moves, the data value the cursor is positioned on is displayed.

ATTENTION

Show cursor function is only active in the state of Stop Monitoring/Pause Monitoring.

Scroll Synchronization

It is used to synchronize the bit graph with the trend graph in time axis. It is useful in monitoring the bit graph and the trend graph data simultaneously.

For scroll synchronization, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Graph > Synchronize Scrolling..

Move the horizontal scroll bar to scroll the bit graph and the trend graph at the same time based on the specified Scroll Synchronization.

Page 526: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.7. Trend Monitoring

528 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Adjust X-axis magnification

It is used to adjust X-axis magnification.

To adjust X-axis magnification:

Select Graph > Zoom In X axis, Zoom Out X axis, Reset X-axis. Based on the selected item, X-axis’s time interval is increased, decreased or back to default value.

Page 527: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.7. Trend Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 529 11/09 Honeywell

Adjust Y-axis magnification

It is used to adjust Y-axis magnification.

To adjust Y-axis magnification:

Select Graph > Zoom In Y axis, Zoom Out Y axis, Reset Y axis. Based on the selected item, Y-axis’s height is increased, decreased or back to default value.

Adjust X-axis Automatically

It is used to decide to adjust X-axis automatically. If the automatic adjustment is set, the horizontal scroll bar disappears and all the data can be seen at a glance.

To adjust X-axis automatically:

Select Graph > Auto-Fit X axis.

Page 528: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.7. Trend Monitoring

530 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Auto-Fit Y-axis

It is used to decide to adjust Y-axis automatically. The automatic adjustment of Y-axis is applicable only to the trend graph.

To adjust Y-axis automatically:

Select Graph > Auto-Fit Y-axis.

ATTENTION

If the function of Auto-fit Y axis is not selected, the display is based on the max./min. value specified in Graph Settings.

Save as Bitmap

It is used to save the graph currently displayed on the screen on the file in window bit map.

To save the data as a bitmap, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Graph > Save Trend data as Bitmap.

2 Input a file name to save with and then click OK.

Page 529: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.7. Trend Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 531 11/09 Honeywell

Save as Text

It is used to save the graph data on the file in text. Samples as many as the max. samples kept specified in setting the max. graph is saved.

To save the data as a text, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Graph > Save Trend data as Text.

2 Input a file name to save with and then click OK.

ATTENTION

The String file is saved in CSV format of Excel.

Copy to Clipboard

It is used to copy the graph currently displayed on the screen onto the window clipboard.

To copy the graph to clipboard, perform the following steps:

Select Graph > Copy to Clipboard.

Page 530: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.8. Data Traces

532 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

12.8 Data Traces Trace Data is used to specify the trace condition and address to trace in the PLC to collect the data complying with the specified condition from PLC. In the SoftMaster, applicable data read from the PLC is displayed as a graph. While being similar to the trend monitoring, it can collect more correct data as read from PLC.

Trace Data operates as follows.

Steps Details

Page 531: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.8. Data Traces

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 533 11/09 Honeywell

Confirm the connection with PLC and the Run status of PLC.

Decide to allow trace or not, And specify trigger condition, sample properties and trace address. See section on Trace Setting for more details.

Write trace setting items on PLC. See section on Write Trace Setting for more details.

Start trace with specified trigger conditions automatically or with manual trace selected. Refer to Trace Setting for detailed trigger setting, and 4) Start Manual Trace in Write Trace Setting for detailed manual trace.

Read trace data from PLC. See section on Read Trace in Write Trace Setting for more details

See section on Trace Setting for more details.

Trace Setting

Writing to PLC

Ready

Trace starts

Read Data

Creating a graph

Page 532: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.8. Data Traces

534 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

To view data trace, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the SoftMaster menu, select Monitor > Data Traces.

3

Field Label Description

a. Menu Displays the data trace menu.

b. Tool Box Displays the tool box of the data trace.

c. Bit graph Index

Displays the bit address and graph color.

d. Bit graph Displays the data of bit address.

e. Word graph Index

Displays the word address and graph color.

f. Word graph Displays the data of word address.

g. Status bar Displays the status of data trace.

Page 533: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.8. Data Traces

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 535 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

h. Progress bar Displays the progress status if data is read from PLC.

PLC status Displays off-line status and the operation status of PLC.

j. Trace status Displays the trace status of PLC.

Connecting to PLC

To connect to the PLC,

Select Online > Connect.

ATTENTION

For additional information, see section on Connection Options for the PLC.

Trace Setting

It is used to specify trace conditions and trace address.

To view or change data trace settings:

Step Action

1 On the SoftMaster menu, select Monitor> Data Traces.

The Data Traces window is displayed as follows.

Page 534: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.8. Data Traces

536 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

2 On the Data Traces window, select Trace > Trace Settings from the menu.

The following dialog box is displayed.

Page 535: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.8. Data Traces

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 537 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

Trace Decides to allow the trace or not.

Trigger settings Specifies the condition for trace start. A trigger condition bit condition or word condition can be selected.

Bit condition Decides to use bit trigger condition or not. As for bit trigger setting, refer to Step 3 Setting Bit Trigger.

Address Specifies the address to monitor the bit trigger condition.

Word condition Decides to use word trigger condition or not. As for word trigger setting, refer to Step 6 Setting Word Trigger.

Address Specifies the address to monitor the word

Page 536: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.8. Data Traces

538 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

trigger condition.

Sampling frequency Specifies the cycle to collect data.

Total sample Specifies the number of samples in total to collect. The number of samples in total is decided based on the input sample address.

Samples after trigger Specifies the number of samples to collect after triggered.

OK Saves the changed items and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

Setting bit trigger

3 To set the bit trigger, select the bit condition check box.

4 Enter the address to use as a bit condition. Bit address format only is available.

5 Specify trigger condition, where rising or falling is available. Rising means that the address value changes from 0 to 1, and falling means that the address value changes from 1 to 0.

Setting Word trigger

6 To set the Word Trigger, select the word condition check box.

It uses the variation of the word address value as a trigger condition.

7 Enter the address to use as a word condition. Word address format only is available.

8 Enter the constant value to compare with word address value.

9 Select a condition to use to compare with the constant value input. Available conditions are as follows.

< (less than), <= (less than or equal to), == (equal to), >= (greater than or equal to), > (greater than),

Bit address settings

10 Select the Bit address settings tab on the Data Trace Settings dialog box.

It is used to select the bit address to collect data. The selected address is

Page 537: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.8. Data Traces

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 539 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

displayed in a bit graph.

Field Label Description

Number of addresses

Displays the number of bit addresses specified.

Size of data Displays the size of the data specified. More than 1 bit address is displayed in 2 bytes.

Address list Displays the list of the bit addresses specified.

Enter the address of bit type. Right-click eth mouse and select Add Line to add a line. Right-click the mouse and select Delete Line to delete the address.

ATTENTION

A maximum of 16 bit type addresses can be entered.

Page 538: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.8. Data Traces

540 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Word Address Settings

11 Select the word address setting tab on the Data Trace Settings dialog box.

It is used to select the word address to collect data. The selected address is displayed in a word graph.

Field Label Description

Number of Address

Displays the number of word address specified.

Size of data Displays the size of the data specified. The size is decided based on the specified data type.

Address list Displays the list of the word addresses specified.

Address Enter the address of word type.

Data type Select the data type of address.

Page 539: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.8. Data Traces

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 541 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

ATTENTION

A maximum of 8 addresses of word type can be entered. Supported data types are as follows.

Type Size Type Size

SINT 1 byte REAL 4 bytes

INT 2 bytes LREAL 8 bytes

DINT 4 bytes INT 2 bytes

LINT 8 bytes DINT 4 bytes

USINT 1 byte LINT 8 bytes

ATTENTION

Use the number of samples in total and the number of samples after triggered to apply various collection methods.

Number of Samples in Total = Number of Samples after triggered: a method to collect data after triggered, which is used when the data before triggered is not necessary.

Number of Samples in Total > Number of Samples after triggered (≠0): a method to collect data even before triggered, which is used when the data before and after triggered is necessary.

Number of Samples after triggered = 0: a method not to collect data after triggered, which is used when the data after triggered is not necessary

Graph settings

To view or change graph address settings:

Select Graph > Graph Settings.

Page 540: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.8. Data Traces

542 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

a) Show grid: used to decide to show XY grid or not on the screen.

b) Show trigger: used to decide to display the trigger position on the graph, and to specify color.

c) Bit graph legend: used to specify the position of bit graph index. The options are displayed as displayed No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left Bottom and Right Bottom for the Bit Index Position.

d) Word graph legend: used to specify the position of word graph index. The options are displayed as No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left Bottom and Right Bottom for the Word Index Position.

e) Color setup: used to specify address color of each graph.

f) OK: applies the changed items and closes the dialog box.

g) Cancel: closes the dialog box.

Page 541: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.8. Data Traces

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 543 11/09 Honeywell

Graph Color Setting

To change the color of a graph, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the address to change its graph color.

2 Click the color column to display applicable dialog box. On the dialog box, select a color and click OK.

Trace

It is used to read the data traced from the PLC or the data specified.

Write Trace Setting

It applies the trace setting to the PLC.

Page 542: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.8. Data Traces

544 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

To view write trace settings:

On the menu, select Trace > Write Trace Settings.

Read Trace Settings

It is used to read trace settings from the PLC.

To view read trace settings:

On the menu, select Trace > Read Trace Settings.

Read Data Traces

It reads trace data from PLC.

To read data traces:

On the menu, select Trace > Read Trace.

Start Manual Trace

It is used to start to trace data under the trace condition currently specified.

To start tracing the data manually:

On the menu, select Trace > Start Manual Trace. If data is currently traced, the applicable menu is inactive.

Animation

Using the trace data read from the PLC, it displays the data chronological sequence.

Animation Settings

To view animation settings:

Step Action

1 On the Data Traces window menu, select Animation > Animation Setting.

Page 543: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.8. Data Traces

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 545 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

Frequency Used to specify the cycle to update the data sample on the screen. Available data update cycles are 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000 and 2000ms value.

OK Applies the changed items and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

Start

It is used to start Animation. Animation is active only with trace data available.

On the menu, select Animation > Start Animation.

Pause

It is used to stop Animation in progress momentarily.

On the menu, select Animation > Animation Pause/Resume.

Resume

It is used to continue Animation which was momentarily stopped.

On the menu, select Animation > Animation Pause/Resume.

Stop

It is used to stop Animation.

On the menu, select Animation > Stop Animation.

Page 544: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.8. Data Traces

546 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Graph Function

REFERENCE - INTERNAL

For additional information on the basic graph functions, see section on Graph Functions.

Move Trigger

It moves the trigger to its generated point of time.

To move the trigger:

On the menu, select Graph > Go to Trigger Position.

File function

It is used to save or read trace setting from the file.

Open

To open a file, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select File > Open.

2 Select a file name to open on the File dialog box and click OK.

Save

To save a file, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select File > Save.

2 Enter the file name to save with on File Save Box and click OK.

Page 545: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.8. Data Traces

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 547 11/09 Honeywell

Save as

To save a file with a specific file name, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select File > Save As.

2 Enter a different file name to save with on File Save Box and then click OK.

Save as Bit Map

It is used to save the graph currently displayed on the screen on the file in window bit map.

To save the data as a bit map, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select File > Send > Save as Bitmap.

2 Enter the name of a file with which to save with and click OK.

Save Text

It is used to save the graph data on the file in text. Samples as many as the max. samples specified in setting the max. graph are saved.

To save trace data as text:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select File > Send > Save Trace data as Text.

2 Enter a file name to save with and then click OK.

Copy Clipboard

It is used to copy the graph currently displayed on the screen to the window clipboard.

To copy the data onto the windows clipboard:

On the menu, select File > Send > Copy to Clipboard.

Page 546: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.8. Data Traces

548 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

View Function

This function is used to display or hide the tool bar and the status display line on the screen.

View Tool Bar

To view toolbar,

On the menu, select > View > Tool Name.

View Status Display Line

To view Status Display Line

On the menu, select View > Status bar.

Data

It displays the trace data value. View Data is active only with trace data available.

To view Trace Data,

On the menu, select View > Trace Data.

Page 547: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.8. Data Traces

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 549 11/09 Honeywell

a) Trace info: displays the trace sampling cycle.

b) View Settings: displays the trace details.

Page 548: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.8. Data Traces

550 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

c) Data Grid: displays the current value specified in the sequence of the samples. The sample data is displayed in negative before triggered, and in positive after triggered.

d) Minimum, Maximum, Average: displays the Min., Max., and Average value per address.

e) Close: closes the dialog box.

Page 549: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 551 11/09 Honeywell

12.9 Custom Events

Overview of Custom events

The Custom Events refer to a series of events whose conditions are the addresses specified by the user. User defined events are registered in the PLC, which monitors the registered events and records the event history if generated. The event history can be used to operate and debug the system.

To set custom events, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Make a program as follows.

Page 550: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

552 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

2 Write the program to the PLC and select Monitor > Custom Event.

3 Select Menu>Add event and setup each items as in the following figure.

Page 551: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 553 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

4 Click Associated Address Setup tab and setup the bit address %MX100 and word address %MW0 as in the following figure to store the data when the event is met.

Page 552: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

554 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

5 Click OK to close the dialog box.

Select Enable for Custom Event Capture and click OK. A message box is displayed as in the following figured since the event setup has been changed. Click Yes on the message box.

6 Change the PLC mode to RUN.

7 Select Monitor > Custom Event on the Online menu to check event history and select event history tab on the Custom Event dialog box.

Page 553: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 555 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

8 In the Event history tab, an Event History dialog box is displayed when an event item is selected, and Properties is clicked, where the list of associated address and the details of event can be seen.

Page 554: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

556 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Event Setting

Example

An event is defined as the data of %MW0 whose data is increase by 1 every scan is greater than 100 and less than 110, and if the event is met, PLC stores the data of %MW0.

For Event setting, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Monitor > Custom Events.

2 Click the Event settings tab on the user event dialog box.

Page 555: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 557 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

Custom Event capture Used to determine allowing the user event or not. If the event is disabled, PLC does not collect the Custom Events.

Events History Displays the list of the Custom Events currently specified.

Menu Displays the event setting menu.

Apply PLC Applies the changed items to CPU without closing the dialog box.

OK Applies the changed items and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

Page 556: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

558 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

For additional information on each item of the events list, see section on Adding Custom Event Item.

Adding Custom Event Item

To add a custom event item, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the Custom Event dialog box, select Add Event from Menu.

2 Select the Basic setting tab.

Field Label Description

Address Used to enter the address to monitor the events. The event address is of the value 0 or 1 in bit format only.

Variable Names Displays Variable/Comment dialog

Page 557: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 559 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

box. The address can be selected from Variable/Comment declared in the Variable/Comment dialog box.

Event condition Used to specify the condition to make the user event occur. If rising condition selected, the user event occurs when the event address value changes from 0 to 1. And if falling condition selected, the user event occurs when the event address value changes from 1 to 0. If transition condition selected, the user event occurs whenever the event address value changes.

Type Used to specify the user event type. An applicable type can be selected among Information, Alarm and Warning.

Message Used to enter an event message. The maximum length of the message is 80 characters in English). The event message input is displayed with Event History menu.

OK Applies the changed items and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

3 Enter event address information, event conditions, event type and event message. Or click the Variable/Comment to select the address from the declared Variable/Comment.

4 Select the Associated address’s setting tab to specify the Associated address. Associated address is used to capture the values of related address including any values.

Page 558: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

560 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Field Label Description

Available Displays the sum of the size of the each associated address type input, which is available up to 16 bytes.

Associated addresses Setup Used to enter the associated addresses. Up to 8 associated addresses can be entered.

5 Click OK to save the entered items, or click Cancel to cancel it.

ATTENTION

Event type is specified by user based on the importance of the event and is used as a classifying method of events for Event View.

Page 559: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 561 11/09 Honeywell

REFERENCE - INTERNAL

For additional information on address type and display format, see section on Variable/Comment. Also see section on Event History.

ATTENTION

If associated addresses are specified, the value of the associated addresses is also recorded when applicable events happen.

Up to 8 associated addresses can be specified in up to 16 bytes based on the data type of the address input. Supported data type and its respective byte size are as shown as follows.

Type Size Type Size

BIT 1 Byte REAL 4 Bytes

USINT 1 Byte LREAL 8 Bytes

UINT 2 Bytes INT 2 Bytes

UDINT 4 Bytes DINT 4 Bytes

ULINT 8 Bytes LINT 8 Bytes

Up to 10 custom events are available for registration.

Editing Events

It is used to edit the user event items.

To edit a user event, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the event to edit.

2 Right-click and select Edit Event from the context menu.

Page 560: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

562 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

3 Make changes and click OK to save the changes, or click Cancel to cancel it.

Deleting Event

It deletes the user event input.

To delete an event, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the event to delete.

2 Right-click on the event and select delete from the context menu.

Page 561: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 563 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 Select Delete All from the context menu to delete all events.

Custom Event Capture

It is used to Enable or Disable event capture:

Corresponding to Custom Event Capture, click Enable, to capture the event, or select Disable to disable the event capture.

Event Capture Setting

You can enable/disable each event from being displayed. To enable/display an event, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the event to be enabled.

2 Select the checkbox corresponding to the event in the Enable column to enable it. Clear the checkbox to disable it.

Page 562: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

564 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Custom Event Copy/Paste

To Copy/Paste custom events, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the event to copy.

Right click and select Copy from the context menu.

2 Move to the position to paste on and select Paste from the right-click context menu.

3 The Event is pasted in the selected row.

Custom Event Cut/Paste

To Cut/Paste custom events, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the event to cut.

Page 563: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 565 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

2 Select Cut from the right-click context menu.

3 Move to the position to paste on.

4 Select Paste from the right-click context menu.

Save Event

Since the user defined event is saved in PLC, it is additionally saved to manage as files.

To save all the events, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select and event and click Save Event from the right-click context menu.

2 Enter a file name to save with on the File Save dialog box and click OK.

Open Event

It read user defined event setting from the file.

To open an event, perform the following steps:

Page 564: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

566 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

1 On the Custom Event dialog box, right-click and select Open Event from the context menu.

2 Select a file to read and then click OK.

ATTENTION

The event if opened is added to the list of current events.

A maximum of 10 custom events are added to the list.

Event History

Read the user event history saved in the PLC to display the details.

To view event history, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Monitor>Custom Event.

2 Select the Event History tab on the user event dialog box.

Page 565: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 567 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

Event History List Displays the event history available on the PLC.

Menu Displays the event history-related menu.

Apply PLC Inactive on the event history page.

OK Applies the changed items and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

ATTENTION

For additional information on event history item see section on Detailed Event History View.

Page 566: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

568 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

REFERENCE - INTERNAL

For additional information on an event history item, see section on Detailed Event History.

Detailed Event History View

It displays the details of the event.

To view the details of an event, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the Custom Event dialog box, select the item to display its Event History.

2 Select Information.

Page 567: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 569 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

Date Displays the date an event occurs in Year-Month-Date.

Time Displays the time an event occurs in Hour: Minute: Second: MS.

Condition Displays event details specified in event setting items.

Related address list Displays the Associated address list and the value when the event occurred. The display format of the address value can be changed by right-clicking on View in hexadecimal or

Page 568: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

570 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

View as specified.

Back Displays the previous event history.

Next Displays the next event history.

Copy Copies the current event history.

Close Closes the dialog box.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL

For additional information on an event history item, see section on Detailed Event History.

Refresh

It updates the event history with recent details in PLC.

To refresh the event history, click Menu>Refresh on the Custom Event window.

Event Filtering

The history can be displayed on the event type. Select View All.

Page 569: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 571 11/09 Honeywell

Select View Information.

View Warning

Select View Warning.

View Alarm

Select View Alarm.

Page 570: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

12. Monitoring 12.9. Custom Events

572 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Page 571: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 573 11/09 Honeywell

13. Debugging

13.1 Start/Stop Debugging

Start Debugging

To start debugging, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Online > Connect to connect to the PLC,

2 On the menu, select Online > Write to download the program to the PLC.

3 On the menu, select Online > Change Mode > Debug or Debug > Start/Stop Debugging.

ATTENTION

Debug is unavailable if PLC operation is in Run mode.

This function is available only with PLC in online mode.

Debug function is available only when the SoftMaster program and PLC program are identical. If they are not identical, download the applicable program.

Monitoring function is also available in Debug mode.

If an error occurs on the PLC, Debug instruction does not work normally. Clear the error to run the Debug instruction.

Stop Debugging

To stop debugging, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Online > Change Mode > Stop or Debug > Start/Stop Debugging.

2 PLC ends Debug and come to the STOP mode.

Page 572: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.1. Start/Stop Debugging

574 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

Even if Debug stops, Monitoring continues.

Page 573: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.2. LD Program Debugging

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 575 11/09 Honeywell

13.2 LD Program Debugging It is used to specify functions to debug the prepared LD program.

Set/Remove Breakpoints

It is used to set or remove the Breakpoint per step.

Set Breakpoint

To set Breakpoints, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the mouse cursor to the step to specify.

2 On the menu, select Debug > Set/Remove Breakpoints.

Page 574: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.2. LD Program Debugging

576 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

ATTENTION

The break cannot be set on the area specified by a Block Mask instruction.

Application instruction sets the breakpoint on the instruction String area.

Remove Breakpoint

To remove Breakpoints, perform eth following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the Breakpoint to the step to remove.

Page 575: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.2. LD Program Debugging

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 577 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

2 On the menu, select Debug > Set/Remove Breakpoints.

Page 576: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.2. LD Program Debugging

578 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Go

It starts program debugging using the specified Breakpoint. With the Go function, the program can be run up to the Breakpoint specified.

To run the program up to the specified Breakpoint, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Debug > Go on the menu. The program runs until the breakpoint complying until the condition is reached.

2 To go to the next Breakpoint, select Debug > Go on the menu.

Page 577: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.2. LD Program Debugging

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 579 11/09 Honeywell

Go to Cursor

It is used to make the program run up to the cursor position.

To run the program until the cursor position, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the position to run.

2 Select Debug > Go to the Cursor.

Page 578: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.2. LD Program Debugging

580 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Into

If the Breakpoint is engaged during debugging, its progress is made step by step. When debugging program, Step Into, Step Out and Step Out functions is provided.

Step Into

It runs the program to the next step. If the current step is an application instruction CALL with the running condition satisfied, it enters the subroutine block.

On the menu, select Debug > Step Into.

Page 579: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.2. LD Program Debugging

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 581 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

If not with CALL instruction or if the CALL running condition is not satisfied, the program runs to the next step.

Page 580: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.2. LD Program Debugging

582 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Out

It is used to step out of the subroutine block once entered with Step into function executed.

On the menu, select Debug > Step Out.

Page 581: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.2. LD Program Debugging

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 583 11/09 Honeywell

-

Page 582: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.2. LD Program Debugging

584 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

If the currently debugged step is not inside the subroutine block, the program is run to the next step.

Page 583: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.2. LD Program Debugging

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 585 11/09 Honeywell

Step Over

It is used to run the program to the next step. Unlike Step Into, even if the current step is an application instruction CALL, it does not enter the subroutine block but run the program to the next step.

On the menu, select Debug > Step Over.

Page 584: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.2. LD Program Debugging

586 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Page 585: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.3. List of Break Points

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 587 11/09 Honeywell

13.3 List of Break Points The list shows all the Break Points being used in the program, where the user can decide to use or delete the Break Point.

On the menu, select Debug > Breakpoints List.

Use: If the breakpoint is deselected, it is not deleted from the list.

Program: displays the name of the program where the breakpoint is used.

Step: displays the Step number where the breakpoint is caught.

Count: After running the number of times as many as the specified steps where the breakpoint is caught, PLC is braked. (Example; If the breakpoint is set inside FOR 20 ~ NEXT with the number of times 10, FOR 20 ~NEXT is run 10 times and then is braked.)

OK: saves the changed details and closes the dialog box.

Cancel: just closes the dialog box without saving the changed details.

Select All: checks all the listed items to allow.

Page 586: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.3. List of Break Points

588 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Reset: cancels all the checked items previously allowed.

Go to: used to move to the position where the selected breakpoint is used.

Remove: deletes the selected breakpoints from the list.

Remove All: deletes all the breakpoints from the list.

ATTENTION

A maximum of 62 Breakpoints can be registered in the PLC.

Page 587: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.4. Variable Break

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 589 11/09 Honeywell

13.4 Variable Break Applicable debugging is available based on the data value and the application of the variable.

Setting Variable Break

On the menu, select Debug > Breakpoint Conditions > Variable Break point.

a) Use the address as a variable break point: If the check in the box is cancelled, the variable break even if saved, is not be used.

b) Variable: shows the variable name used for variable break.

c) Program: shows the program name of the variable used for variable break.

d) Address: displays the address name if the variable’s memory is allocated in the local variable.

e) Comment: displays the comment if the variable’s comment is declared in the local variable.

f) Value Condition: If the selection is cancelled, the value even if saved, does not make the value break engaged.

Page 588: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.4. Variable Break

590 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

g) Value: if the specified address value is reached, the break is engaged. The maximum/minimum value is based on the variable type.

h) OK: saves the changed details and closes the dialog box.

i) Cancel: just closes the dialog box without saving the changed details.

j) Select Variable: finds a specific variable on the Variable list.

k) Condition: makes the break engaged when writing the value on or reading the value from address.

Variable Break Run

To set variable break run, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Specify the variable break.

2 On the menu, select Debug > Go. PLC runs debugging.

3 If specified variable break conditions are met, a message is displayed to inform that the variable break is engaged, when PLC stops running.

Page 589: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.4. Variable Break

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 591 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

Among variable types, BYTE, NIBBLE and STRING do not support the variable break instruction.

When the PLC is in debug mode, the meeting of any one condition (breakpoint, variable break, scan break, etc.), applies the break.

Click on the program name to move to the program position where the variable break is applied.

If the value is changed in other application programs (such as address monitor) than the specified program, movement to the program position where the variable break is applied may not be possible.

Page 590: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.5. Scan Break

592 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

13.5 Scan Break This function is used to run PLC as many as the scan times specified, and apply the break.

To use the Scan Break function, perform eth following steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Debug > Breakpoint Conditions…

2 Select Scan Break point tab.

a) Use Scan Break point: If the check in the box is cancelled, the specified scan break times even if saved, is not run while PLC runs debugging.

b) Scan Count: used to enter scan times to apply the break. 1 ~ 2147483647 is available for the setting value.

Page 591: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.5. Scan Break

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 593 11/09 Honeywell

Scan Break Run

To apply scan break, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Check Use Scan Break and specify the scan times to apply the break.

2 If Debug > Go is selected on the menu, PLC runs debugging.

3 PLC informs that the scan break is engaged after executed as many as specified scan times.

Page 592: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

13. Debugging 13.5. Scan Break

594 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Page 593: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 595 11/09 Honeywell

14. Online Editing

14.1 Online Editing Sequence This Online Editing function is used to edit the PLC program with PLC operation status in RUN mode.

* 프로그램 창이

Open Project

Connect

Start Online Editing

Start Monitoring

Edit

Write Modified Program

End Online Editing

* Start Online Editing starts after active.

* Start Online Editing and Write Modified Program can be repeated.

Page 594: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

14. Online Editing 14.1. Online Editing Sequence

596 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Open Project

On the menu, select Project > Open Project. Open the project identical to the PLC project to perform Online Editing.

Or

On the menu, Select Project > Open from PLC.

Connect

On the menu, select Online > Connect to connect to the PLC.

Start Monitoring

On the menu, select Monitor > Start Monitoring.

Online Editing is available while monitoring.

Start/Stop Monitoring is available during Online Editing.

Start Online Editing

On the menu, select Online > Start Online Editing.

Online Editing is available after its program window is active and the program is selected.

After Program or Variable is edited during Run, the program window changes to edit mode during Run.

Page 595: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

14. Online Editing 14.1. Online Editing Sequence

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 597 11/09 Honeywell

If Online Editing starts, the background color of the program can be changed through its applicable option.

Edit

Edit Online Editing is the same as specified in the off-line Edit.

In case of the LD, the edited rung is indicated with (‘*’).

Page 596: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

14. Online Editing 14.1. Online Editing Sequence

598 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Write Modified Program

On the menu, select Online > Write Modified Program.

The applicable program only is transferred to PLC.

In case of the LD, the edited rung is indicated with (‘*’).

End Online Editing

On the menu, select Online > End Online Editing.

Page 597: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

14. Online Editing 14.1. Online Editing Sequence

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 599 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

Project cannot be closed during Online Edit

One or more programs can be modified during Run.

While editing during Run, the monitoring value is not correct.

For the items to edit during Run, refer to the followings

(Edit Item means that add, delete and change are available)

Item Description Edit Item Description Edit

Add X Add ○

Delete X Delete X Project properties

Change X

User defined function/function block

Change X

Add X LD Edit ○

Delete X IL Edit X Program

Change ○ SFC Edit X

Add ○ Add X

Delete X Delete X Global variable

Change X

SFC action (LD)

Change ○

Add ○ Add X

Delete ○ Delete X Local variable

Change ○

SFC Transition (LD)

Change ○

Add ○ Parameter change Edit X

Delete X Local variable retain setting

Edit ○ User-defined type

Change X Global variable retain setting

Edit X

Page 598: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

14. Online Editing 14.1. Online Editing Sequence

600 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Page 599: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 601 11/09 Honeywell

15. Printing

15.1 Print Project

Printing a Project

This instruction is used to print the contents of a project sequentially.

It is also used to select items to be printed, specify necessary setting options for printing per item, and execute Preview and Print instruction.

To print the contents of a project, perform the followings steps:

Step Action

1 On the menu, select Project > Print Project.

2 Print Project dialog box appears.

3 Specify each item.

Page 600: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

15. Printing 15.1. Print Project

602 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Project Level Diagram: displays tree structure of the item printable in the Project. Detailed setting functions are available in the tree structure of the Level Diagram. Print and Previous View functions are available for the selected item.

h) Print: prints the selected item in the Project Level Diagram.

i) Save Selection Item: saves the selected item in the Project Level Diagram.

j) Details: used to specify details of the selected item in the Project Level Diagram.

k) Preview: used to view the selected item previously to print in the Project Level Diagram.

l) Settings: sets the general print options such as Printer Setting, Print Page Setting, Margin Setting, etc.

ATTENTION

Details button in the Project Level Tree is enabled only if Cover, Program, I/O parameter are selected.

Refer to each print option for setting each detailed item. (Program Print Setting Refer to Program Print)

Address and Memory Reference used in the Project Level Diagram are identical to those on the window displayed when View > Used Address and View > Cross Reference are executed on the menu.

Print Setting

It is used to specify paper to print on and the printer.

Click Settings>Page Setup on the Print Project dialog box or right click on the Print Project dialog box and select Page Setup from the context menu.

.

a) Details: Refer to Print Setting for each item.

b) Page Setting: used to specify paper to print on.

Page 601: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

15. Printing 15.1. Print Project

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 603 11/09 Honeywell

c) Header/Footer: used to enter String displayed on the Header and Footer

Page Setup

It is used to specify margins of paper to print.

To specify the Page setup, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Click Printer Settings on the main Print dialog box or right-click the mouse the a. Project Level Diagram.

2 On the menu, select Page Setup.

Where the selected paper and layout of margins can be viewed previously.

Page 602: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

15. Printing 15.1. Print Project

604 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Used to select paper to print on.

Used to select a printing direction.

Back to Default: details of Margins, Header and Footer are changed back to default, the basic value specified when the program installed

Margin Setting: specifies margins of paper printed.

Printer: used to change the setting options of the printer.

ATTENTION

Ensure that print contents do not overwrite with header or footer when printed, with respect to margins.

If there are no contents in header/footer, the header/footer is not printed.

Header/Footer Setting

It is used to specify the content of Header/Footer.

Content Setting: used to enter the content in the left/center/right of the Header/Footer.

Page 603: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

15. Printing 15.1. Print Project

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 605 11/09 Honeywell

a) Insert Field: used to insert the field into the position of the cursor currently placed on the Edit Box (left, center, right).

Page 604: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

15. Printing 15.1. Print Project

606 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

- If the content of the header/footer is long, the header/footer in the left, center or right may be printed as overwritten with each other.

- The user can specify the content of the header/footer using Input and Field at the same time. Example) If the content of “The date today is &d” is input on the header/footer “The date today is 2004-06-01”is printed.

Field Content

Date: &d yyyy-mm-dd

Time: &t hh:mm:ss

Project name: &p

PLC name: &c

PLC type: &T

Page number/Total Page number: &n Page number/Total Page number of the selected items

Page number/Item page number: &N Page number/Item page number of one item

Program name: &P displayed only in program print mode.

File Name: &f file name of the current project

Path and file name: &F file name displayed with its directory route.

Project comment: &C Project comment is printed if any. The comment if too long may not be correctly printed.

Cover Setup

It is used to specify the print cover.

To specify the print cover, perform eth following steps:

Step Action

1 Select Cover in the Project Level Diagram on the Print Project dialog Box.

2 Right-click Cover and select Details or click or press Enter key.

Page 605: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

15. Printing 15.1. Print Project

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 607 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

Cover Paper Default is A4 vertical. Printed differently based on the paper setup. If the Edit Box exceeds the paper, the exceeded area is not printed.

Margin Display Displays the specified margins with a dotted line.

Edit Box Displays the content printed on the cover, where the content, font and position can be changed.

Edit Used to edit the content of the currently selected Edit Box. Double-click the mouse on Edit Box or press Enter key when the Edit

Page 606: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

15. Printing 15.1. Print Project

608 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Box is selected to edit. If the Field is inserted, Edit is also available.

Font Changes font of the currently selected Edit Box.

Add Adds a new Edit Box to the print cover.

Delete Deletes the currently selected Edit Box.

OK Applies the changed items and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

Add Content

To add content, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Click Add.

2 Move the mouse on the paper.

3 The mouse cursor changes.

4 Click on the paper to view an Edit dialog box as in the following figure.

5

6 Pressing ESC changes the mouse cursor to the arrow shape again.

Page 607: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

15. Printing 15.1. Print Project

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 609 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

Edit Box can be aligned in the paper and the Edit Box.

It is available through the menu displayed by the right mouse button clicked on the paper.

Edit Box > Center: aligns the selected Edit Box on the center of paper.

String > left Align: aligns the content of the selected Edit Box on the left in the Edit Box.

The edge of the Edit Box is not printed.

Edit Box can be moved by Drag and Drop instruction of the mouse or with the arrow keys.

Undo and Redo are not available.

If string including field is previously viewed, the field is displayed as analyzed. If edited, the field is displayed back.

Page 608: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

15. Printing 15.2. LD Program Print

610 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

15.2 LD Program Print It is used to print the selected LD program.

Print Setting

To configure the print setting, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the program item to print.

2 On the menu, select Project > Print.

Page 609: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

15. Printing 15.2. LD Program Print

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 611 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Label Description

Select Program Selects a program to print. In LD program, IL program print cannot be selected.

View Options Used to specify View Options for printing. Refer section on Viewing Program Options for each View Option.

Contact Used to specify the number of contacts in a line. The number of contact is fixed to the number currently displayed if printing is executed in the LD program.

Print Range Used to specify print range.

Print in Color Used to decide to apply Color print or not. If the check box is selected, the print is in color, and if not, it is in black-and-white.

Print Grid Used to decide to apply Grid Print or not.

Print Output Comment

Used to print output comment.

Print Starts to print with the currently specified options applied.

OK Applies the currently specified options and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

Print Setting Used to specify the printer setup options.

Page Setting Used to call Page setup dialog box. The size of paper and space of print page can be setup in the Page Setup dialog box.

ATTENTION

When printing the project, click Details after selecting the program name to set print setup.

Page 610: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

15. Printing 15.2. LD Program Print

612 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Print Preview

It is used to see a preview of the specified print job.

On the menu, select Project > Preview.

Page 611: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 613 11/09 Honeywell

16. User Function/Function Block

16.1 Overview You can personally create and use a function/function block, which is not provided by SoftMaster. The User Function/Function Block can be created as follows.

Page 612: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

16. User Function/Function Block 16.2. Create User Function/Function Block

614 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

16.2 Create User Function/Function Block

Create User Function/Function Block Program

Perform the following steps to create a User Function/Function Block.

Step Action

1 Select Project > Add Item >-Function.

Or,

Select Project > Add Item > Function Block.

The following screen appears.

Program Name: Used for entering a User Function/Function Block. When the

Page 613: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

16. User Function/Function Block 16.2. Create User Function/Function Block

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 615 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

user-defined function/function is registered, the input name is registered.

Language: Used for selecting a programming language for the User Function/Function Block. A user-defined function is created only by the LD language while a user-defined function block can be created by the LD, SFC or ST language.

Use EN/ENO: Used for selecting whether to use or not EN/ENO, which is used under the operation condition of function/function block. If not selecting EN/ENO, you should declare BOOL type variable in the first input and first output parameters of the function/function block.

Return Data Type: Designates a type of the results after a user-defined function is executed. It is activated only when a user-defined function is created.

Program description: Used for entering the comment of a User Function/Function Block. Do not enter comment if unnecessary.

OK: Saves the input in the dialog box and closes the dialog box.

Cancel: Cancels the input in the dialog box and closes the dialog box.

ATTENTION

If you click OK, a new item with the name input in the item of User Function/Function Block is created.

Page 614: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

16. User Function/Function Block 16.2. Create User Function/Function Block

616 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Page 615: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

16. User Function/Function Block 16.3. Create User Function/Function Block I/O Variable

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 617 11/09 Honeywell

16.3 Create User Function/Function Block I/O Variable Perform the following steps to create a user function/function block I/O variable.

Step Action

1 Double-click a local variable among the items created with the name of User Function/Function Block, the following local variable screen is created.

a) VAR_RETURN: A type of variable representing the value of user-defined function. It is automatically created as a variable with the same name of the user-defined function with return type designated when creating a user-defined function.

b) Function type: Used to automatically display input variable, I/O variable, function/function block type by output variable in the local variable screen. The type is as same as when using the User Function/Function Block in the scan program.

2 Add input variable, I/O variable and output value in the local variable screen. Depending on the added I/O variables, the function/function block type is automatically changed on the bottom of the local variable screen.

Page 616: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

16. User Function/Function Block 16.3. Create User Function/Function Block I/O Variable

618 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

ATTENTION

Minimum Input variable and output variable must be at least one. But, the maximum number is limited to 32.

Page 617: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

16. User Function/Function Block 16.4. User Function/Function Block Programming

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 619 11/09 Honeywell

16.4 User Function/Function Block Programming Perform the following steps to create a user function/function block programming.

Step Action

1 Double-click a program among the items created with the newly input name in the User Function/Function Block, a program screen with the previously designated language appears.

The following screen shows the screen created when selecting the LD.

2 Create a program, based on the variable input in the local variable screen.

Page 618: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

16. User Function/Function Block 16.4. User Function/Function Block Programming

620 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Page 619: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

16. User Function/Function Block 16.4. User Function/Function Block Programming

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 621 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

ATTENTION

If local variable edit and program edit are finished, select function/function block toolbar instruction to check whether the edited User Function/Function Block is registered.

Page 620: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

16. User Function/Function Block 16.5. Working with User Function/Function Block

622 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

16.5 Working with User Function/Function Block Perform the following steps to use user function/function block.

Step Action

1 Open the program to use a User Function/Function Block and move the cursor to the position to input.

2 Click Function/Function Block Toolbar.

3 Select a User Function/Function Block in the function/function block dialog box.

Page 621: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

16. User Function/Function Block 16.5. Working with User Function/Function Block

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 623 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

4 Enter the variable to be used in the input/output of function/function block.

Page 622: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

16. User Function/Function Block 16.5. Working with User Function/Function Block

624 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Page 623: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 625 11/09 Honeywell

17. SoftMaster Simulator

17.1 Overview of the SoftMaster Simulator (SIM)

Features of SoftMaster-SIM

SoftMaster-SIM is a simulated PLC for MasterLogic PLC series. If using the SoftMaster-SIM, you can run your program without the PLC, or you can debug a PLC program by using input condition setting or module simulation function.

SoftMaster-SIM supports the following function:

1. Program simulation

You can simulate the program written by LD/SFC/ST in the SoftMaster. It supports online editing by which you can edit during RUN mode and debugging function by which you can trace the program as step unit.

PLC online function

You can use program monitoring function and online diagnosis function such as system monitoring, address monitoring, trend monitoring, data trace and custom events.

Module simulation

You can simulate the digital I/O module, A/D conversion module, D/A conversion module, counter, Temperature control module, positioning module. By using simulation function, you can set the input value of each module.

I/O input condition setting

You can set address value by setting specific address value or channel value of the module as input condition. If you use I/O input condition setting, you need not write other program to test PLC program.

System configuration for execution of SoftMaster-SIM

The system configuration required by SoftMaster-SIM is higher than that of SoftMaster.

Minimum specification: Pentium 3 900MHz, RAM 256MB

Recommended specification: Pentium 4 1.5GHz, RAM 512MB more

Page 624: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.1. Overview of the SoftMaster Simulator (SIM)

626 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

In case of minimum specification, the fixed period scan may not operate properly because scan period may be longer than the fixed period and disconnection may occur. Despite using recommended specification, if system load is heavy, same phenomenon may occur. And regardless of system specification, according to user setting like system’s SLEEP mode, disconnection can occur.

When using fixed period, fixed period error/warning dialog box may not be displayed.

Starting SoftMaster-SIM

To start SoftMaster-SIM, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Start SoftMaster and write the program to execute through the SoftMaster-SIM.

2 On the SoftMaster menu, select Tools > Start Simulator. If SoftMaster-SIM is executed, the program is downloaded into SoftMaster-SIM automatically. If SoftMaster-SIM is executed, status becomes online, connection, stop.

Page 625: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.1. Overview of the SoftMaster Simulator (SIM)

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 627 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 On the menu, select Online > Change Mode > Run and execute the downloaded program. When using SoftMaster-SIM, for online menu supported by SoftMaster, refer to the following table.

Menu items support Menu items support

Open from PLC ○ Fault Mask Ⅹ

Change Mode (Run) ○ Module changing Wizard

Change Mode (Stop) ○ Start online editing ○

Change Mode (Debug) ○ Write Modified program ○

Disconnect Ⅹ End online editing ○

Read Ⅹ Start/Stop monitoring ○

Write ○ Pause ○

Compare with PLC Ⅹ Resume ○

Set Flash Memory (Set) Ⅹ Pausing conditions ○

Set Flash Memory (Remove)

Ⅹ Change current value ○

Reset PLC Ⅹ System monitoring ○

Clear PLC ○ Address monitoring ○

PLC Information (CPU) ○ Special module monitoring

Page 626: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.1. Overview of the SoftMaster Simulator (SIM)

628 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Menu items support Menu items support

PLC Information (Performance)

○ Custom events ○

PLC Information (Password)

○ Data traces ○

PLC Information (PLC RTC)

○ Start/stop debugging ○

PLC History (Error Log) ○ Debug (Go) ○

PLC History (Mode Log)

○ Debug (Step Over) ○

PLC History (Shut down Log)

○ Debug (Step Into) ○

PLC History (System Log)

○ Debug (Step Out) ○

PLC errors/warnings ○ Debug (Go to Cursor) ○

I/O Information ○ Set/Remove Breakpoints

Force I/O ○ Breakpoints List ○

Skip I/O ○ Breakpoint conditions ○

Page 627: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 629 11/09 Honeywell

17.2 Program window configuration

Configuring the Program window

The following figure displays the typical SoftMaster-SIM screen.

1. Channel list

Displays favorite channels according to module and channel. In case of module, displays only module set in I/O parameter. In module, B0 means base no. and S00 means slot no.

2. I/O condition

Displays single I/O condition and continuous I/O condition.

Displays simulator’s status.

Page 628: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

630 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Status Description Window

Initial conditions Displays initial status. Connection by simulator is not available.

Connection available

It means connection is ready and turns on red LED.

Single I/O condition execution

It means Single I/O condition is under execution. Under execution, green LED flickers.

Continuous I/O

condition execution

It means Continuous I/O is under execution. Under execution, yellow LED flicker.

Channel list

Module channel

In tree view, double-click the channel you want to read. If you use specific channel as favorite channel, check favorite channel box.

Page 629: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 631 11/09 Honeywell

Channel monitor

Perform the following steps to monitor a channel.

Step Action

Start monitoring:

1 On the menu, select Tool > Start channel monitoring.

Modify channel current value

1 Select channel you want to modify current value.

2 In the selected channel, move to the current value column

3 Double-click or press Enter and displays Channel Value Modification dialog box.

Page 630: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

632 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Module Name: displays the module name.

Channel Name: displays the channel name.

Channel type: displays the data type of the selected channel.

Bit value: in case of bit type, select off/on.

Input Value: in case of not bit type, input the value directly.

In case that value is output value, you can not change the current value of each channel.

Stop channel monitoring:

1 On the menu, select Tool > Stop channel monitoring.

I/O condition

I/O condition is used to write a specific value to specific address when specific condition is met by user input. For example, If address %IX0.0.0 become 1, set address %MX0~%MX100 as 1.

The user should modify address value periodically by using the “monitor current value of SoftMaster” or write other PLC program to test PLC program. SoftMaster-SIM support reflects the data yielded to a module or entered from a module to a program.

Condition expression

Displays condition expression used in the single input condition and continuous condition. One condition expression consists of more than one condition by combination of conditions.

Type Operator Priority Contents

== 4 Equal

!= 5 Not equal

> 6 Greater than

>= 7 Greater than or equal to

<= 8 Less than or equal to

Comparison

< 9 Less than

Page 631: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 633 11/09 Honeywell

Type Operator Priority Contents

+ 2 Add

- 3 Subtract

* 0 Multiply

Numerical operation

/ 1 Division

& 12 Bit multiply

| 13 Bit sum Bit operation

^ 14 Exclusive bit sum

&& 10 Logical multiply Logical operation || 11 Logical sum

( - ETC.

) -

Comparison target is address or channel.

For example, If you write ‘address %MW0 is larger than 100 and %M10 is on’ as condition expression, the condition expression is as follows.

(%MW0 > 100) && (%MX10 == TRUE)

It supports 5 addresses such as %I, %Q, %M, %R, %W.

Basic functions

Single I/O condition and continuous I/O has the following interface.

Page 632: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

634 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Adding I/O condition

To add an I/O condition, perform eth following steps:

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to the position to add a new I/O condition.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Properties.

3 Edit I/O condition and click OK.

Edit I/O condition

To Edit an I/O condition, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select an I/O condition to edit.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Properties.

Page 633: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 635 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 Modify the items in the I/O condition dialog and click OK.

Cut/Paste I/O condition

To Cut/Paste an I/O condition, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select I/O condition to cut.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Cut.

3 Move to the position to paste, on the menu, select Edit > Paste.

Copy/Paste I/O condition

To Copy/Paste an I/O condition:

Step Action

1 Select I//O condition to copy.

Page 634: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

636 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

2 On the menu, select Edit > Copy.

3 Move to position to paste, on the menu, select Edit > Paste.

Delete I/O condition

To delete an I/O condition:

Step Action

1 Select I/O condition to delete.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Delete.

Page 635: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 637 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Insert Line

To insert a line, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select line to insert.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Insert Line.

Delete Line

To delete a line, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Select the position you want to delete.

2 On the menu, select Edit > Delete Line.

Page 636: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

638 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Single I/O condition

In single I/O condition, if execution option is satisfied, copy the value to the selected Address/Channel.

Page 637: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 639 11/09 Honeywell

Field Label Description

Use condition Used to decide if you use I/O condition. If you do not enable this, SoftMaster-SIM does not use the condition set by user.

Name Used to enter I/O condition’s name.

Description Used to enter a description about I/O condition.

Always execute Regardless of condition set by user, it executes Output Setting when it start.

Execution by button Executes Output Setting when pressing the button.

Execution by condition expression

Executes Output Setting when it satisfies the condition expression set by user.

View Channel Browser Displays channel browser. It is activated when selecting the Execution by condition expression.

a) Address/Channel: Inputs channel or address name to register.

b) Set value: Inputs setting value. Address, channel, constant is available.

Page 638: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

640 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Continuous I/O condition

In the continuous I/O condition, when the condition is met, enter the value to the selected address/channel in every scan continuously.

Field Label Description

Use condition Used to decide if you use I/O condition. If you do not enable this, SoftMaster-SIM does not use the condition set by user.

Name Used to enter name of the I/O condition.

Description Used to enter a description of the I/O condition.

Always execute Regardless of condition set by user, it executes Output Setting when it starts.

Execution by button Used to execute the Output Setting when pressing the button.

Execution by condition expression

It executes Output Setting when it meets the condition expression set by user.

View Channel Browser Displays channel browser. It is activated when selecting the Execution by condition.

Page 639: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 641 11/09 Honeywell

Field Label Description

Repeated Execution Select if you input the output value repeatedly.

Ignore Condition while execution

Select whether checking the operating condition or not.

Output setting Displays continuous value setting dialog box.

Page 640: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

642 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

When setting continuous I/O, it writes the value in the continuous value setting to each address/channel in order. If the Ignore Condition set during execution, only the first value is written. If “Always Execute” is set, all the values are written in sequence. And if you set repeated value, it writes value repeatedly.

Continuous value no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Value 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

For example,

① not setting Ignore Condition while execution/ not setting Repeated Execution (Execution by button / condition expression is false)

7 → 7 → 7 → 7 → 7 → 7 → 7 → 7

② not setting Ignore Condition while execution/ not setting Repeated Execution (Always execution / condition is true)

7 → 6 → 5 → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1

③ setting Ignore Condition while execution / not setting Repeated Execution

7 → 6 → 5 → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1

④ not setting Ignore Condition while execution / setting Repeated Execution (Execution by button / condition expression is false)

7 → 7 → 7 → 7 → 7 → 7 → 7 → 7 → 7 → 7 → 7 → 7 → 7 → 7 → …

Page 641: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 643 11/09 Honeywell

⑤ not setting Ignore Condition while execution / setting Repeated Execution (always execution / condition is true)

7 → 6 → 5 → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 → 7 → 6 → 5 → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 → …

⑥ setting Ignore Condition while execution / setting Repeated Execution

7 → 6 → 5 → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 → 7 → 6 → 5 → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 → …

Continuous Value Setting dialog box

Input setting value

Enter the value to set as output value in the continuous I/O condition.

Field Label Description

Page 642: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

644 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Address/channel Enter the address or channel to set value.

Value Enter only constant such as integer, real, hexadecimal.

OK Saves it and closes dialog box.

Cancel Cancels input category.

Set continuous value

Select address or channel to enter continuous value.

To enter a continuous value, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Double-click the column to enter address/channel.

2 Address/channel input dialog appears.

3 Enter address or channel and click OK.

Field Label Description

Channel/Address Name Used to enter channel or address.

View Channel Browser Displays the channel browser.

OK Saves it and closes dialog box.

Cancel Cancels input category.

Input value

To enter values, perform the following steps:

Page 643: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 645 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

1 On the Continuous Value Setting dialog, move the cursor to the position to enter the value.

2 Enter the value.

Auto fill

To Auto fill, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 On the Continuous Value Setting dialog, select the area to be copied.

2 Move the cursor to the corner, cursor changes.

3 Drag the cursor down with left mouse button pressed.

Page 644: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

646 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

ATTENTION

If you use control key when auto fill, you can input increased/decreased value according to mouse drag direction.

I/O condition monitor

Start monitoring

To start monitoring, perform the following steps:

On the menu, select Tools > Use single I/O condition or Tools > Use continuous I/O condition.

Page 645: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 647 11/09 Honeywell

End monitoring

To end monitoring, perform the following steps:

On the menu, Cancel Tools > Use single I/O condition or Tools > Use continuous I/O condition.

ATTENTION

Program is executed from first step to last step repeatedly and we call this process as scan program. SoftMaster-SIM is also executed through scan and has the following process.

Page 646: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

648 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Module simulation

SoftMaster-SIM supports simple simulation function for the I/O module and special module. In case of digital I/O module, it supports I/O function about I or Q area and in case of special module it supports monitoring function such as analog input or output value monitoring.

Setting of module

All simulation function in the SoftMaster-SIM use information set in the I/O parameter. Hence, ensure that you set each module in the I/O parameter to simulate module and reflect it to program.

For example, in order to simulate the following PLC system, set the I/O parameter as follows.

Base Slot Module name Module type

Basic base 0 2MLI-D21A DC 2

4V input 8 points

Basic base 1 2MLF-AV8A Voltage type A/D conversion module (8 channels)

Basic base 2 2MLF-HO2A Open collector type high speed module (2 channels)

After executing the SoftMaster-SIM, the module set in the I/O parameter are displayed as follows in System Monitoring.

Page 647: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 649 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

To apply I/O parameter set in the SoftMaster, download I/O parameter to SoftMaster-SIM. In case the module has been changed, re-launch SoftMaster-SIM module changes, execute the SoftMaster-SIM again.

Digital I/O module

In the digital I/O module’s simulation, you can change contact point’s current value or check if output is normal. According to I/O module setting in I/O parameter, it has the following characteristics.

Not setting I/O module Setting I/O module

Modification of input value Modification of the monitor current value is available.

Modification of the SoftMaster-SIM channel value is available.

Modification of output value

Not available Not available

Forced I/O input Not applied Applied

Not applied Applied

Analog input module (A/D conversion module)

SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog input module.

Module name Support

2MLF-AV8A (Voltage type 8 channel) ○

2MLF-AC8A (Current type 8 channel) ○

Page 648: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

650 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

2MLF-AD4S (Insulation type 4 channel) Ⅹ

SoftMaster-SIM supports four types of input voltage range and digital data output format and two types of input current range. It is as follows.

Input voltage range Input current range Digital data output

format

1 ~ 5V 4 ~ 20mA 0 ~ 16000

0 ~ 5V 0 ~ 20mA -8000 ~ 8000

0 ~ 10V - 1000 ~ 5000

-10 ~ 10V - 0 ~ 10000 (%)

SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog input parameter.

Parameter Support Parameter Support

Operation channel ○ Filter constant ○

Input voltage(current) range

○ Filter process ○

Output data type ○ Average method ○

Filter process Ⅹ Average value ○

You can set analog input value in the SoftMaster-SIM window and input range is effective within voltage (current) set in parameter.

ATTENTION

For the analog module’s parameter setting and how to program, refer to the user manual of each module.

You can set the analog input value in the SoftMaster-SIM window

Page 649: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 651 11/09 Honeywell

Analog output module (D/A conversion module)

SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog output module.

Module name Support

2MLF-DV4A (Voltage type 4 channel) ○

2MLF -DV8A (Voltage type 8 channel) ○

2MLF -DC4A (Current type 4 channel) ○

2MLF -DC8A (Current type 8 channel) ○

2MLF -DV4S(Insulation type voltage output 4 channel)

2MLF -DC4S(insulation type current output 4 channel)

SoftMaster-SIM supports the following voltage (current) range and input data type.

Input data type Output voltage range Output current range

0 ~ 16000 1 ~ 5V 4 ~ 20mA

-8000 ~ 8000 0 ~ 5V 0 ~ 20mA

1000 ~ 5000 0 ~ 10V -

0 ~ 10000 (%) -10 ~ 10V -

SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog output parameter.

Parameter Support

Operation channel ○

Output voltage (current) range ○

Input data type ○

Channel output status Ⅹ

You can input digital input value through special module variable and it is effective within the range set in parameter.

Page 650: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

652 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

For analog output module’s parameter and how to program, refer to the user manual of each module.

You can check the changed analog output value in the SoftMaster-SIM window’s channel item.

High Speed counter module (HSC Module)

The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following high speed counter module.

Module Name Support

2MLF -HO2A (Open collector 2 channel) ○

2MLF -HD2A (Open driver 2 channel) ○

The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following high speed counter parameter.

Parameter Support Parameter Support

Count mode Ⅹ Comparison output 0 maximum setting value

Pulse input mode Ⅹ Comparison output 1 minimum setting value

Preset ○ Comparison output 0 maximum setting value

Ring counter minimum value Ⅹ Output status setting ○

Ring counter maximum value Ⅹ Additional function mode Ⅹ

Comparison output 0 mode ○ Section setting value (ms) Ⅹ

Page 651: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 653 11/09 Honeywell

Parameter Support Parameter Support

Comparison output 1 mode ○ Pulse number per 1 cycle Ⅹ

Comparison output 0 minimum setting value

○ Frequency display mode Ⅹ

ATTENTION

For parameter specific contents of high speed counter module and how to program, refer to the user manual of each module.

In the SoftMaster-SIM window’s channel item, you can change current count value. High speed counter simulation compare the inputted count value with parameter setting value and use it as comparison output signal.

RTD module

The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following RTD module.

Module name Support

2MLF -RD4A (4 channel) ○

2MLF -RD4S (insulation type 4 channels) Ⅹ

2MLF -TC4S (insulation type 4 channels) Ⅹ

The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following temperature input parameter.

Parameter Support Parameter Support

Operation channel ○ Process Alarm High-High Limit Ⅹ

Sensor type ○ Process Alarm High Limit Ⅹ

Temperature unit ○ Process Alarm Low Limit Ⅹ

Filter constant Ⅹ Process Alarm Low-Low Limit Ⅹ

Page 652: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

654 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Parameter Support Parameter Support

Average process Ⅹ Process Alarm Hysteresis Ⅹ

Average value Ⅹ Input variation alarm setting type

Scaling data type Ⅹ Input variation alarm Upper Limit

Scaling minimum value Ⅹ Input variation alarm Lower Limit

Scaling maximum value Ⅹ Input variation alarm detection Cycle

ATTENTION

For parameter specific content of RTD module and how to program, see the user manual of each module.

You can set temperature input value in the SoftMaster-SIM window’s channel item.

Advanced positioning module (APM module)

ATTENTION

In the SoftMaster-SIM, it can’t support the full function of APM function. The APM module of SoftMaster-SIM is made to help you understand the function block related with APM and its program operation and error may be different with real PLC. And because SoftMaster-SIM supports part of error related with APM, some error may be occur in real PLC. The following is APM function block list that SoftMaster-SIM supports.

For position module supported by SoftMaster-SIM, refer to the following table.

Module name Support

Page 653: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 655 11/09 Honeywell

2MLF -PO1A (Open collector 1 axis) ○

2MLF -PO2A (Open collector 2 axis) ○

2MLF -PO3A (Open collector 3 axis) ○

2MLF -PD1A (Line Driver 1 axis) ○

2MLF -PD2A (Line Driver 2 axis) ○

2MLF -PD3A (Line Driver 3 axis) ○

The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following step data parameter (X/Y/Z axis).

Parameter Support Parameter Support

Coordinate Ⅹ Circular interpolation sub address [pulse]

Control Method ○ M code Ⅹ

Operation Pattern ○ ACC/DEC No. Ⅹ

Operation method Ⅹ Operation speed ○

Target position [pulse] ○ Dwell time Ⅹ

Circular interpolation direction

Ⅹ - -

The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following operating parameter (X/Y/Z axis).

Parameter type Item Support

Basic parameter Bias speed ○

Extension parameter External command selection ○

External command ○

External stop ○

External contemporary start ○

External speed/position conversion

Origin/Manual parameter Origin address X

Page 654: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

656 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Home High speed X

Home Low speed X

Origin/Manual parameter JOG High speed ○

JOG Low speed ○

Inching speed ○

The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following APM exclusive function block..

Page 655: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 657 11/09 Honeywell

Function block Command Support

APM_ORG Homing start X

APM_FLT Floating origin setting ○

APM_DST Direct start ○

APM_IST Indirect start ○

APM_LIN Linear interpolation start X

APM_CIN Circular interpolation start X

APM_SST Simultaneous start ○

APM_VTP Speed/position conversion

X

APM_PTV Position/speed conversion X

APM_STP Stop ○

APM_SKP Skip operation ○

APM_SSP Position Sync. X

APM_SSS Speed Sync. ○

APM_POR Position override ○

APM_SOR Speed override ○

APM_PSO Speed override with position

X

APM_NMV Continuous operation ○

APM_INCH Inching start ○

APM_RTP Manual operation previous location return

APM_SNS Start step no. modification ○

APM_SRS Repeated step no. modification

APM_MOF M code off ○

APM_PRS Current position preset ○

Page 656: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

658 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Function block Command Support

APM_ZONE ZONE output allowance ○

APM_EPRS Encoder preset ○

Teaching function block - X

APM_EMG Emergency stop ○

APM_CLR Error reset ○

APM_PST Point operation X

APM_PWR Point operation step data setting

X

APM_SRD Read current status ○

APM_CRD Read operation status code information

APM_ENCRD Read encoder value X

APM_JOG JOG start X

APM_MPG Manual pulse operation X

The following is APM command error code in the SoftMaster-SIM.

Error code Meaning

151 Operating data’s operating speed can not be set as 0.

221 Direct start command can not be executed during operation

224 Direct start command can not be executed in the absolute coordinate of zero point non-determination status.

231 Indirect start command can not be executed during operation.

234 Indirect start command can not be executed in the absolute coordinate of zero point non-determination status.

Page 657: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 659 11/09 Honeywell

Error code Meaning

291 Contemporary start command can not be executed during operation.

294 Contemporary start command can not be executed in the absolute coordinate of zero point non-determination status.

321 Decreased speed stop command can be executed during operation.

331 Skip command can be executed during operation.

355 There is error in the setting of speed synchronous command’s master/slave axis.

356 There is error in the setting of speed synchronous command’s master/slave axis rate.

361 Position override command can be executed during operation.

371 Speed override command can be executed during operation.

391 Continuous operation command can be executed during operation.

401 Inching command can not be executed during operation.

431 Auto operation point return command can not be executed during operation.

441 Start step no. modification command can not be executed during operation.

461 Position teaching command can not be executed during operation.

481 Inner emergency stop

Page 658: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

660 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

ATTENTION

Positioning module specific parameter is set in the APM package. To set parameter used in the positioning module, set operating parameter in the APM package and save project file as follows. And APM project file should be in the SoftMaster project file folder.

BxSyz.apm (x base number, yz slot number, no distinction between small and capital letters)

Base Slot Project storage name

0 0 B0S0.apm

0 10 B0S10.apm

1 0 B1S0.apm

1 11 B1S11.apm

2 0 B2S0.apm

2 12 B2S12.apm

For specific parameter setting of APM module, refer to the APM package user manual.

You can check APM module’s status in the SoftMaster-SIM window’s channel item.

Page 659: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.2. Program window configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 661 11/09 Honeywell

ATTENTION

Meaning of channel name of positioning module is as follows (Example: X axis standard)

Channel name Meaning

XCurrentPosH Upper 16 bit among X axis current position value

XCurrentPosL Lower16 bit among X axis current position value

XCurrentVelH Upper 16 bit among X axis current speed value

XCurrentVelL Lower 16 bit among X axis current speed value

Page 660: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.3. Limitations

662 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

17.3 Limitations SoftMaster-SIM has the following limitations in comparison with real PLC.

Watchdog timer

In 2MLI PLC, we set watchdog timer to prevent error. But in SoftMaster-SIM, it doesn’t work properly because scan time in SoftMaster-SIM is longer than that in PLC.

Communication module

SoftMaster-SIM don’t support function related with communication module. So the following function block doesn’t work and just saved in SoftMaster-SIM.

Category Name Function

Station address setting P2PSN Sets other station address

Reading area setting (BOOL)

P2PRD_BOOL Sets BIT data reading area

Reading area setting (BYTE)

P2PRD_BYTE Sets BYTE data reading area

Reading area setting (WORD)

P2PRD_WORD Sets WORD data reading area

Reading area setting (DWORD)

P2PRD_DWORD Sets DWORD data reading area

Reading area setting (LWORD)

P2PRD_LWORD Sets LWORD data reading area

Writing area setting (BOOL)

P2PWR_BOOL Sets BIT data writing area

Writing area setting (BYTE)

P2PWR_BYTE Sets BYTE data writing area

Writing area setting (WORD)

P2PWR_WORD Sets WORD data writing area

Writing area setting (DWORD)

P2PWR_DWORD Sets DWORD data writing area

Writing area setting (LWORD)

P2PWR_LWORD Sets LWORD data writing area

Page 661: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 663 11/09 Honeywell

18. ST Edition

18.1 Writing ST program ST based on character is program language and conforms to IEC 61131-3.

Scan program, user function/FB, SFC can be written by ST language.

Adding Scan Program

Perform the following steps to add a scan program.

Step Action

1 Select Scan Program in the project window.

2 Select Project > Add item > Program.

Page 662: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.1. Writing ST program

664 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

3 Select ST in Language in the above screen and enter program name and description.

Adding User Function/Function Block

Perform the following steps to add a user function/function block.

Step Action

1 Select User Function/Function Block in the project window.

Page 663: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.1. Writing ST program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 665 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

2 Select Project > Add Item > Function or Function Block.

3 Enter the name and description. Select ST in Language. In case of Function, select Return data type.

Page 664: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.1. Writing ST program

666 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Adding SFC transition, action

Adding SFC Transition

Perform the following steps to add transition.

Step Action

1 Select transition in which you want to input program in SFC program.

2 After selecting transition, double-click it or press Enter.

Page 665: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.1. Writing ST program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 667 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 Enter the name and comment.

4 Select Program in Type.

5 Select ST as Language in Add Program window.

Perform the following steps to add an action.

Step Action

1 Enter the Name and Comment.

2 Select Program in Type in the Action Properties window.

Page 666: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.1. Writing ST program

668 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

3 Select ST as Language in the Add Program window.

Page 667: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.2. Limit

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 669 11/09 Honeywell

18.2 Limit When editing ST language, there is the limit as described below.

Item Content Limit

Maximum number of character in one line

Maximum number of character in one line is 2,048 for English and 1,024 for Korean.

2,048

ATTENTION

Only one scan program is available.

Language of User Function/Function Block, SFC transition and action can be different with language of scan program.

Program cannot be converted into program written other languages.

Page 668: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.3. Editing Program

670 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

18.3 Editing Program

Shortcut keys

The followings are the shortcut keys.

You can change shortcut key using Tools > Shortcut key Settings.

Action Shortcut key Description

Copy Ctrl + C Copies selected character string.

Paste Ctrl + V Pastes copied character string.

Delete Del Deletes selected character string.

Cut Ctrl + X Copies selected character string and deletes it.

Undo Ctrl + Z Cancels edition.

Redo Ctrl + Y Cancels Redo action.

Select All Ctrl + A Selects all character strings.

The followings are shortcut key about movement. You cannot change the following shortcut keys.

Shortcut key Description

Home Goes to start of line.

Ctrl + Home Goes to start of program.

→ Moves cursor to right one space.

← Moves cursor to left one space.

↑ Moves cursor to upper line.

↓ Moves cursor to lower line.

End Goes to end of line.

Page up Goes to upper one page.

Page down Goes to lower one page.

Ctrl + End Goes to end of edited line.

Ctrl + → Goes to start of next word.

Page 669: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.3. Editing Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 671 11/09 Honeywell

Shortcut key Description

Ctrl + ← Goes to start of previous word.

Ctrl + Del Deletes by start of next word.

Ctrl + BS Deletes by start of current word.

Shift + Move Selects from current cursor location to location to move.

ATTENTION

The described shortcut key is based on default of SoftMaster.

For user defined- shortcut key, refer to section Shortcut Keys.

Copy/Paste

Copies selected character string into clipboard and pastes it.

Perform the following steps to copy and paste the character string.

Step Action

1 Select the character string to copy.

2 Select Edit > Copy.

3 Move to location to paste the copied character string.

4 Select Edit > Paste.

Page 670: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.3. Editing Program

672 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

ATTENTION

Clipboard: memory area of PC to save temporary information.

When parting, if you select the area, the character string is overwritten and if you do not select the area, it is inserted.

Only text is pasted.

Undo/Redo

Undo cancels edition and Redo cancels Undo action.

Perform the following steps to do Undo and Redo actions.

Step Action

1 After executing Paste, select Edit > Undo.

Pasted contents are deleted.

2 Select Edit > Redo.

Paste action is executed again.

Page 671: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.3. Editing Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 673 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Adding/Selecting variable

Enter a variable at the selected location.

Perform the following steps to add or select variable.

Step Action

1 After moving the cursor, select Edit > Select/Add Variable.

a) Variable: Enter name of direct variable or declared variable. If the entered character string is variable type and is not registered as variable, Variable Addition/Edit dialog box shows.

Page 672: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.3. Editing Program

674 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

b) Local variable: Displays the declared local variable list.

c) Direct variable: Displays direct variable comment.

d) Flag: Displays flag in the list. Type of flag list can be selected in List.

e) List: Displays type of flag list. There is system/High speed link/P2P/PID.

f) All: Selects whether only flags related with Parameter number, Block index are displayed or not.

g) Parameter number: Enter number to sort flags. 0~12 for high speed link, 0~12 for P2P, 0~63 for PID.

h) Block index: Enter number to sort flags. 0~127 for high speed link, 0~63 for P2P.

i) Global Variable: Displays global variable list. It is available to register as EXTERNAL variable.

j) New Variable: Recalls dialog box to add variable to local variable list.

k) Edit Variable: Recalls dialog box to edit the selected variable.

l) Delete Variable: Deletes the selected local variable from local variable list.

m) OK: Saves entered or selected items and closes dialog box.

n) Cancel: Closes the dialog box.

Page 673: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.3. Editing Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 675 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

a) Variable: inputs variable name.

b) Data Type: selects data type of variable.

c) Variable Kind: selects Variable Kind of variable.

d) Address: assigns direct address about variable.

e) Initial Value: inputs initial value of variable.

f) Trigger: inputs trigger status about variable.

g) Retain: inputs Retain status about variable.

h) Description: inputs Description about variable.

2 Inserts variable at the cursor location.

ATTENTION

If you select Select/Add Variable with cursor placed in the empty area, you can add new variable.

If you select Select/Add Variable after selecting character string, that character string is replaced into variable.

Inserting Function/Function Block

Insert Function/Function Block at the cursor location.

Perform the following steps to insert function or function block.

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to insert.

2 Select Edit > Function/FB.

Page 674: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.3. Editing Program

676 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Name: Enters name of Function (Block) to use.

a) Search: Searches Function (Block) about the entered name.

b) List: Used for sorting Function, Function Block.

c) Category: Indicates category of Function (Block).

d) Function List: displays list of Function (Block) in the selected category.

e) Function Information: Displays information of Function (Block). In case of Function, it is available to set properties about input parameter. In case of Function Block, it is available to set instance name and instance class.

f) OK: Applies the changes and closes window.

g) Cancel: Closes window without saving application.

Page 675: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.4. Viewing Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 677 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 Function/Function Block is inserted.

ATTENTION

I/O parameters of function/function block are not inserted automatically. You should edit them additionally.

18.4 Viewing Program It describes about display properties in the ST program.

ST option

Perform the following steps to view ST option.

Step Action

1 Select Tools > Options.

2 Select ST.

Page 676: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.4. Viewing Program

678 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

a) Parameter information: When inserting Function//FB, example text of IO parameter is added.

b) Auto list members: When inserting character string by keyboard, variable or Function/FB starting with same character are displayed.

c) Auto macro statement: When inserting the control text of ST (IF, WHILE, SWITCH), control text is completed according to ST grammar

d) Tab size: Enters tab size.

e) Show tip text: When cursor is on the character string in ST program, description of character string is displayed.

f) Auto indent: When changing line with ENTER, indent is applied automatically with same tab size of previous line.

g) Enhance: Character string used in ST program is displayed with various colors according to variable, comment, Function (Block).

Page 677: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.4. Viewing Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 679 11/09 Honeywell

Font/Color

Used for designating the font or color in the ST program.

Perform the following steps to change the font in the ST program.

Step Action

1 Select Tools > Options.

2 Select ST > Font/Color.

3 Change Font.

ATTENTION

You can not change the character size.

Default font is “Fixedsys”.

For more details, refer to Customizing SoftMaster.

Perform the following steps to change the color in the ST program.

Step Action

1 Select Tools > Options.

2 Select ST > font/color.

3 Change color.

Page 678: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.4. Viewing Program

680 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

ATTENTION

For more details, refer to chapter Customizing SoftMaster.

Zoom

ST program does not support Zoom function.

Tab

When using Tab, Tab size is designated.

Perform the following steps to change the tab size.

Step Action

1 Select Tools > Options.

2 Select ST.

3 Change Tab size. The following screen shows the tab size 4.

Page 679: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.4. Viewing Program

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 681 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

The following screen shows the tab size 8.

ATTENTION

Default tab size is 4.

Range of tab size is 1~100.

Showing line numbers

Shows/hides line numbers in the ST program.

Perform the following steps to show line numbers.

Step Action

1 Select Tools > Options.

2 Select SoftMaster Common Editor.

3 Check Show line numbers.

Page 680: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.5. Additional Edition Function

682 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

18.5 Additional Edition Function Describes additional edition function.

Book mark

You can set and remove the bookmarks.

Setting book mark

Perform the following steps to set the bookmark.

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to set bookmark.

2 Select Edit > Bookmark > Set/Remove.

Page 681: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.5. Additional Edition Function

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 683 11/09 Honeywell

Removing Bookmark

Perform the following steps to remove the bookmark.

Step Action

1 Move the cursor to remove bookmark.

2 Select Edit > Bookmark > Set/Remove.

Page 682: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.5. Additional Edition Function

684 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Removing all bookmark

Perform the following steps to remove the bookmark

Step Action

1 Select Edit > Bookmark > Remove All.

Previous bookmark

To go to previous bookmark,

Select Edit > Bookmark > Previous Bookmark.

Next bookmark

To go to next bookmark,

Select Edit > Bookmark > Next Bookmark.

ATTENTION

Bookmark is set by line unit.

Undo/Redo cannot cancel action about bookmark.

Page 683: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.5. Additional Edition Function

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 685 11/09 Honeywell

Selection from character string list

When entering character string, displays the character string starting with same character string and you need to select it properly.

Perform the following steps to select character string.

Step Action

1 Enter character string by keyboard.

2 Select character string from list.

3 Press Enter or double-click the character string.

Page 684: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.5. Additional Edition Function

686 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

ATTENTION

Following are the description of character string list bit map.

1. : ST language key word (IF, CASE WHILE etc.)

2. : Variable name

3. : Flag variable name

4. : Function name

5. : Function block instance name

6. : User defined-function name

7. : User defined-function block instance name

Selecting member variable from character string list

It is used for selecting member variable from character string list by name of FB or user data type instance.

Perform the following steps to select member variable from character string list.

Step Action

1 Enter ‘.’ after name of FB or user data type instance.

For example, instance name of TON is TON_Inst.

2 Select member variable to input.

Page 685: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.5. Additional Edition Function

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 687 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 Press ‘Enter’ or double – click.

Setting/Removing Block Mask

Sets or removes the Block Mask area. The Block Mask area is not executed.

Block Mask area is indicated by symbol “(*” and “*)”.

Setting Block Mask

Perform the following steps to set block mask.

Step Action

1 Select area to set Block Mask.

Page 686: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.5. Additional Edition Function

688 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

2 Select Edit > Set/Remove Block Mask.

Page 687: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.5. Additional Edition Function

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 689 11/09 Honeywell

Removing Block Mask

Perform the following steps to remove block mask.

Step Action

1 Select area in which Block Mask is already set.

2 Select Edit > Set/Remove Block Mask.

Page 688: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.5. Additional Edition Function

690 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Setting/Removing Line Block Mask

Selected line is not executed.

Symbol“//” Is used to set Line Block Mask.

Setting line block mask

Perform the following steps to set line block mask.

Step Action

1 Select area to set line block mask.

2 Select Edit > Set/Remove Line Block Mask.

Page 689: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.5. Additional Edition Function

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 691 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Removing line block mask

Perform the following steps to remove line block mask.

Step Action

1 Select area to remove line block mask.

2 Select Edit > Set/Remove Line Block Mask.

Page 690: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.5. Additional Edition Function

692 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Page 691: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.5. Additional Edition Function

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 693 11/09 Honeywell

Indent/Outdent

Makes indent/outdent at the selected area.

Indent

Perform the following steps to make indent.

Step Action

1 Select area to make indent.

2 Press TAB.

Page 692: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

18. ST Edition 18.5. Additional Edition Function

694 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Outdent

Perform the following steps to make outdent.

Step Action

1 Select area to make outdent.

2 Press Shift + TAB.

Page 693: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 695 11/09 Honeywell

19. Event Input Module

19.1 Overview The 2MLF-SOEA Module (event input module) is for the recording of the events entered from outside. The event input module is a data recording device which can record event information (time and state) in 1ms resolution. The event input module has not program device or external device used in the CPU. The event input is available only for monitoring and file saving using the SOE monitor.

2MLK/I/R CPU: save 3,000 events at maximum (Up to 3,000 events can be saved in the order of occurrence.)

2MLF-SOEA module: save 300 event at maximum

Characteristics of SOE Monitor

1. This is a software package for the operation and monitoring of the 2MLF-SOEA module of 2MLT series.

2. This package provides a function that enables independent operation of the SOE monitor, regardless of the SoftMaster.

3. This enables data monitoring and saving.

Functions of the SOE Monitor

The SOE monitor is an exclusive software package which runs on a PC platform and communicates with the CPU of ML200 series for easy and fast operation of 2MLF-SOEA.

The major functions of the SOE monitor are as follows.

1. Read/save event history

2. Delete event history

3. View module parameter setting

4. Save event history in and Excel file

Page 694: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.2. Screen Configuration

696 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Files Created in the SOE Monitor

When you create and edit a project, the files having the extensions below are created.

<Name>.set: the logging file for the event the user has created. This file is created at saving the event.

<Name>.xls: the module event file created by the user. Event record is saved in an Excel file.

19.2 Screen Configuration This section describes the basic screen elements, windows and pop-up menus.

On the Monitor menu, click SOE Monitoring in the SoftMaster monitor state. The following figure displays.

Page 695: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.2. Screen Configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 697 11/09 Honeywell

Field Description

Menu Basic menu is provided for using the software program.

Tools Menu can be easily selected and executed with toolbar.

SOE Shows the elements of the current project.

Event monitor window

Shows the event information of the module selected in the project.

Status bar Shows the information of the event and connected PLC.

Menu structure

If you select a menu item, commands appear. The commands can be executed with mouse or keyboard. Some menus provide shortcut keys.

File

Command Description

New logging session Create the project.

Open logging Open an existing logging file.

Save logging as Save the logging file with a different file name.

Export to file Save the current logging data in an Excel file.

Exit End the SOE monitor

View

Command Description

All events Show all hidden events in an activated window.

Filtering Show only the events meeting the filtering criteria.

Newest first Show the data in the order of recent to old in the monitor window.

Oldest first Show the data in the order of old to recent in the monitor window.

Find event Search desired event.

Module Property Show parameter setting (in online operation)

Page 696: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.2. Screen Configuration

698 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Online

Command Description

Connect/Disconnect Connect with or disconnect from the PLC.

Connection setting Set up access method.

Clear PLC event history Delete the event data saved in the PLC CPU memory.

Clear SOE module event history

Delete the event data saved in the SOE module memory.

Clear all SOE event history

Delete all the event data saved in the memory of the SOE module in the PLC system.

Refresh event Load the event data of the SOE module.

Tool

Command Description

Option User can configure SOE monitor environment for user convenience.

Customize User defines tools and commands.

Window

Command Description

New window Open a new window in the activated window.

Cascade Arrange the windows in the SoftMaster in cascade layout.

Tile Horizontally Arrange the windows in the SoftMaster in horizontal layout.

Tile Vertically Arrange the windows in the SoftMaster in vertical layout.

Close all Close all the windows of the SoftMaster.

Help

Command Description

About SOE monitoring Provides the information on the SOE monitor.

Page 697: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.2. Screen Configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 699 11/09 Honeywell

Tools

Frequently used menu items are provided with respective shortcut keys (icons).You can execute the menu by clicking the icon.

To create a new toolbar, perform the following steps.

Step Action

1 On the Tools menu, click Customize.

2 Click New. The New Toolbar dialog box appears.

3 Enter tool name.

4 Click OK button. A toolbar without tool is created.

Page 698: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.2. Screen Configuration

700 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Field Description

Toolbars Select/Clear the check box in front of the items to make the toolbar appear/disappear.

New Create a new toolbar.

Reset Initialize the toolbar.

5 Select the Command tab.

6 Create a toolbar and click OK.

SOE Event History Window

The SOE monitor displays the 2MLF-SOEA module SOE event history window automatically when connected with PLC CPU.

Double-click the desired module to run the event monitor window.

Page 699: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.2. Screen Configuration

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 701 11/09 Honeywell

CPU event history: Select the event saved in the CPU module.

Module event history: Select the event saved in the SOE module.

Double-click the CPU event history or module event history to activate the event monitor window.

Status Bar

The following figure displays the status bar of SOE Monitoring window.

Event No.: Shows the number of the events in the event monitor window.

PLC name: Shows the name of the PLC connected with the SOE monitor.

Online: Shows the PLC connection status of the SOE monitor.

Page 700: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.3. Basic Parameter Setting

702 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

19.3 Basic Parameter Setting Basic parameters of the 2MLF-SOEA can be set up using the menu or toolbar of the SoftMaster.

Setting Items

Sets up the method of saving the history occurred in the 2MLF-SOEA module in the CPU module.

In the project tree, click Parameter > Basic Parameter. The Basic parameter settings screen appears.

Reset with recent History: Used for saving the most recent event. If there are more than 3,000 events, the oldest event is deleted and the new event is saved.

Retain initial History: Used to maintain the first event. If there are more than 3,000 events, no new events will be saved.

Page 701: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.4. I/O Parameter Setting

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 703 11/09 Honeywell

19.4 I/O Parameter Setting I/O parameters of the 2MLF-SOEA can be set up using the menu or toolbar of the SoftMaster.

Setting Item

It sets up the method of saving the external event history in the 2MLF-SOEA module.

Perform the following steps to set I/O parameter.

Step Action

1 In the project tree, click Parameter > I/O Parameter. The I/O Parameter Setting screen appears.

2 In the I/O Parameter Setting window, click the slot of the base where the module is mounted.

In the example below, the 2MLF-SOEA module is at #4 slot, #0 base.

3 In the I/O Parameter Setting window, select the desired module from the drop-down arrow.

Page 702: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.4. I/O Parameter Setting

704 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

4 After selecting the module, click Details. The SOE Module screen appears.

Page 703: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.4. I/O Parameter Setting

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 705 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Description

Input Filter set up the time which enables an event to be identified as an effective input data.

(Setting range: 1ms ~ 100ms)

SOE History Reset with recent history: use this to save the most recent event.

If the events exceed 300, the oldest event is deleted and the last one is saved.

Retain initial history: use this to retain the first event.

If the events exceed 300, the last one will not be saved.

Event setting details

Set up the input condition of the event.

Type: Rise, Fall or simultaneously, Rise/Fall of event can be set up.

Event conditions can be set up for each input contact point.

Chattering: Abnormal signals not related with event can be processed as chattering.

(Setting range: 2~127)

Example of input filter setting

Condition is as follows.

Input filter: 1ms

Detail event setting: ‘Rise/Fall’ events simultaneously

Sequence diagram of event occurrence is as follows.

Page 704: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.4. I/O Parameter Setting

706 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Chatter Setting

Chatter setting enables the module to identify an event repeated many times during a short period of time as chattering, and not an effective event. Some sensors using mechanical contacts may cause chattering, which can be eliminated with this function.

Setting items

1. Number of events: 2~127 (‘0’: detection is disabled)

2. Event number: Enter the number of the events including the first effective signal (min. 2)

3. Chatter detection time (duration): If this chatter detection time is passed from the time the first effective event was detected, the chatter detection function for the specific event frequency is terminated, even if the set-up number of chattering is not completed.

4. Min. chatter detection time (duration): Co-related with the set up chattering event number.

Page 705: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.4. I/O Parameter Setting

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 707 11/09 Honeywell

In addition, since an event has passed the input filter, it should satisfy following criteria;

(Number of Events × Input Filter Value) < Chatter Detection Time (Duration)

or,

Input Filter Value < (Chatter Detection Time (Duration) / Number of Events)

For example,

If, chatter detection time = 30ms, number of chattering events = 5,

30ms ÷ 5 = 6ms,

Therefore, the input filter must be less than 6ms.

Example of chatter setting

Condition:

Input filter: 1ms

Detail event setting: ‘Rise’ event

Chatter event: 4

Chatter time: 8ms

Sequence diagram of event occurrence is as follows.

Page 706: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.5. View Module Information

708 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Chatter time measurement: begins from the recognition of an event

Two of the four events passing the filter are ignored by chatter detection function. The last event which enters after expiration of the chatter detection time is recorded normally as the first event of a new period.

19.5 View Module Information SoftMaster supports viewing event input module information.

To view module information, perform the following steps.

Step Action

1 Click Online > Connect. After connecting to PLC, click Online > I/O Information. The following screen appears.

Page 707: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.5. View Module Information

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 709 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

2 Click Details. The module 2MLF-SOEA information as shown below.

Page 708: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.6. Event History Monitor

710 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

19.6 Event History Monitor The events entered into the CPU and event input modules can be monitored with the SOE monitor.

To monitor event input modules with SOE monitor, perform the following steps.

Step Action

1 Click Online-> Connect. The SOE Monitoring menu is activated only after connecting to PLC.

2 Click Monitor > SOE Monitoring.

The SOE Monitoring screen appears.

Page 709: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.6. Event History Monitor

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 711 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

3 From the SOE Monitoring window, click Online > Connect.

The information of the event input module in the connected system appears.

4 CPU Event History: the event history stored in the CPU module.

Module Event History: the event history stored in the SOEA module.

Double-clicking the CPU event history or module event history will activate the event monitor window.

5 Double-click CPU Event History and click Online > Refresh Event.

6 Double-click Module Event History and click Online > Refresh Event.

7 Event history information:

Page 710: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.6. Event History Monitor

712 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

8 Click View > All Event to search and compare all events.

9 Click View > Filtering to search the behavior of a specific event.

Page 711: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.6. Event History Monitor

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 713 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Description

Specify Event Occurred Position

Specify the bit at which the event has occurred.

Event type Specify the input condition at which the event has occurred.

Show SOE installed position only

Used only for CPU event history filtering. Only the base and slot of event input module appears.

Base/Slot Used only for CPU event history filtering. Specifies base and slot.

Begin/End Specify the event filter with the time and the first event, and the last event.

Page 712: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.6. Event History Monitor

714 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Example of Event filter

Event occurrence point filter setting:

Filtering result:

Event occurrence point setting: No. “0” bit

Event type setting: “Rise” event.

You can also filter events based on Base and Occurred time.

Prioritizing Events

Priority to the recent events: the recent events have priority over the old events in the display list.

#0 bit

Rise Event

Page 713: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.6. Event History Monitor

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 715 11/09 Honeywell

Priority to old events: the old events have priority over the recent events in the display list.

To view the recent events first, click View > Newest First.

To view the old events first, click View > Oldest First.

From recent to older events

Page 714: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.6. Event History Monitor

716 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Comparing Events

Compare the events stored in the CPU and event input modules and show the result.

To compare the events, click View > Compare Event.

From old to recent events

Page 715: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.6. Event History Monitor

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 717 11/09 Honeywell

Deleting Event history

Delete CPU history: the history stored in the CPU module is deleted.

To delete CPU history,

Click Online > Clear PLC Event History.

To delete the history stored in the module,

Click Online > Clear SOE Module Event History

To delete the history stored in all the SOEA modules,

Click Online > Clear All SOE module History.

Page 716: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

19. Event Input Module 19.7. Save as an Excel File

718 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

19.7 Save as an Excel File This section describes how to save an event file as an Excel file.

To save an event file as an excel file, perform the following steps.

Step Action

1 Select the event history to be converted into an Excel file in the event monitor window.

2 Click File > Export to file.

3 Enter a new file name in the Save As dialog.

4 Click Save to create a new Excel file.

ATTENTION

The conversion to an Excel file is effective only for the currently active main screen (one window).

5 Open file in the Excel application (to read the saved event file in Excel).

Page 717: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 719 11/09 Honeywell

20. Dedicated ML200R Function

20.1 Redundancy Parameter On Project Window, double-click Redundancy Parameter to set redundancy parameter as shown in the following window.

Redundancy parameter is consisting of ‘Run Mode’ and ‘Redundancy synchronization area’ as shown in the following dialog box.

Page 718: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.1. Redundancy Parameter

720 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

The following table describes all the fields in the Redundancy Parameter dialog box.

Field Description

Disable the warning message about Single CPU Mode

If Master CPU is operated without standby CPU, the warning message of redundancy system appears. If it is checked, the warning message does not appear. The default value is appearing warning message.

Extended Base Detach Error

When extended base is detached, it decides whether it is considered as error or entire system goes to initial status and restarts the operation when extended base is attached again. The default value is that entire system goes to initial status and restarts the operation when extended base is attached again.

Page 719: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.1. Redundancy Parameter

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 721 11/09 Honeywell

Field Description

I/Q Base It synchronizes a data of I/Q Base data. It can set from the first base to the final base. By checking the box, it determines whether synchronizing I/Q area or not. If it is checked, it synchronizes from first base to final base. The default value is 0~31 base.

M Area It synchronizes data of M area. It can set from the position of first word to the position of final ward. By checking the box, it determines whether synchronizing M area or not. If it is checked, it synchronizes from first area to final area. The default value is %MW0~%MW2000.

R Area It synchronizes data of R area. It can set from the position of first word to the position of final ward. By checking the box, it determines whether synchronizing R area or not. If it is checked, it synchronizes from first area to final area. The default value is %RW0~%RW2000.

W Area If R area is set, synchronization area of W defines automatically.

PID Block It synchronizes data of PID block. It can set from the first block to final block. By checking the box, it determines whether synchronizing PID block area or not. If it is checked, it synchronizes from block area to final block area. The default value is 0 block.

Default Initialized to Default setting.

OK Saves the setting value of Run mode and Redundancy synchronization area.

Cancel Cancels the setting value of Run mode and Redundancy synchronization area.

Page 720: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.2. Redundancy PLC State Window

722 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

20.2 Redundancy PLC State Window Redundancy PLC state window appears automatically when SoftMaster connects with 2MLR PLC.

The following table describes the fields in the Redundancy PLC state window.

Field Description

a Project name of SoftMaster or Program name of SoftMaster-NM/System Monitor

b A-side PLC Run mode

c A-side PLC Warning: No-display if warning is not existed.

d A-side PLC error: No-display if error is not existed.

e Standby CPU image: Shaded PLC

f CPU status display: Standby, A-side

g Signal line: 1 line – Bus topology, 2 lines – Ring topology

h CPU status display: Master, B-side

i B-side PLC error: No-display if warning is not existed.

j B-side PLC warning: No-display if error is not existed

k B-side PLC Run mode

Page 721: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.3. Control Redundancy

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 723 11/09 Honeywell

Field Description

l Master CPU image: Colored PLC

20.3 Control Redundancy To control redundancy,

Select Online > Control Redundancy.

Change of master CPU

The following table describes the fields in the Redundancy control window.

Field Description

Master CPU Display of Master CPU, A-side or B-side

You can switchover the Master CPU It displays state of redundancy changeable state. If it is disable, it displays the possible case to make redundancy change.

Change Redundancy change command. If redundancy change is not disabling, it

Page 722: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.3. Control Redundancy

724 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Field Description

displays by inactive mode.

ATTENTION

In case Redundancy state is changeable,

1. When the Master CPU is in stop mode

2. When the Master CPU has error

3. When the redundancy system is in run mode

Standby CPU control

The following table describes the fields of the Standby CPU in the Redundancy Control window.

Field Description

a The Standby CPU is available: Available Standby CPU state

b Standby CPU mode: Standby CPU Run/Stop mode change

c Standby CPU mode: Only Standby CPU Reset or Overall reset

Page 723: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.4. System Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 725 11/09 Honeywell

20.4 System Monitoring System configuration and base information is displayed by System Monitoring.

System Configuration

To perform system configuration, Select PLC.> System Configuration.

Page 724: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.4. System Monitoring

726 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

System configuration contains below information.

1. Connection state between base

2. Connection cable type between base

3. In case of electric cable, it displays measured time and distance.

4. It displays data synchronization cable between Master and Standby CPU.

5. It displays base information of selecting base by clicking mouse button (or pressing enter key).

Page 725: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.4. System Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 727 11/09 Honeywell

Node Count Change

Node Count Change makes to decide how many nodes displays in window.

To change Node Count,

Select View > Node Count, then selects node among [2], [3], [4], [5], [6].

Default setting value is 2.

To view node count [2], select View > Node Count - [2].

Page 726: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.4. System Monitoring

728 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

To view node count [4], select View > Node Count - [4].

Base Information

It displays base information installed in base.

Page 727: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.4. System Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 729 11/09 Honeywell

Master/Standby base

The above diagram displays the following.

1. It displays information and base number of CPU module.

2. State indicator: It indicates state of CPU.

3. RING: If it is consisted of Ring topology, LED indicates On.

4. RED: If it is operated by Redundancy operation, LED indicates On.

5. MASTER: If it is master mode, LED is On.

6. CPU-A: If CPU-A is On, LED indicates On.

7. CPU-B: If CPU-B is On, LED indicates On.

8. RUN: If operation mode is Run mode, LED indicates On.

Page 728: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.4. System Monitoring

730 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

9. STOP: If operation mode is Stop mode, LED indicates On.

10. WAR: Warning is occurred in CPU, LED indicates On.

11. ERR: Error is occurred in CPU, LED indicates On.

12. Key state: Key state information of CPU.

Expansion base

It displays base number of expansion module.

Base information

1. Base information contains the information of base connection and cable.

2. By selecting expansion drive module/expansion manager and PLC > Module Information, Base information appears.

3. By Double-clicking expansion drive module/expansion manager, Base information appears.

Page 729: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.4. System Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 731 11/09 Honeywell

The above diagram displays the following.

1. Base Number: Base number which is set in the switch of base setting for expansion drive module

2. O/S version: OS version of expansion drive module

3. Node Status: It displays connection status between bases whether it is Ring or Bus operation.

4. Base Total Count: Total number of nodes

5. Port 1 Number: Base number connected with port 1

6. Port 1 Cable: Cable type (Optic/Electric) connected with port 1. In case of Electric cable, it displays the measured length of cable for port 1.

7. Port 1 Date: In case of Electric cable, it displays the measured date for port 1.

8. Port 2 Number: Base number connected with port 2.

9. Port 2 Cable: Cable type (Optic/Electric) connected with port 2. In case of Electric cable, it displays the measured length of cable for port 1.

10. Port 2 Date: In case of Electric cable, it displays the measured date for port 1.

Page 730: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.4. System Monitoring

732 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Base Changing Wizard

Base can be changed easily by Base Changing Wizard while PLC is operating. Base Changing Wizard has 4 steps Selecting Base, Removing Base, Installing New Base, and Changing Base Finished.

ATTENTION

In 2MLR system, a part of expansion base can be exchanged according to configuration of expansion base.

Ring topology: All expansion bases can be exchanged.

Bus topology: In Bus topology, final expansion base is only changed..

Perform the following steps to change base.

Step Action

1 Selects Online > Base Changing Wizard.

2 In Selecting Base step, selects base for changing and click Next button.

Page 731: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.4. System Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 733 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Description

a Information: Information of Selecting Base step.

b Base module tree: It displays base module. Changeable base is displayed according to connection state of expansion base.

( : Changeable base, : Non-changeable base )

c List of module on slot: It displays the information of module on selected base.

d Back: It is always inactive mode while selecting base step.

e Next: Next step to Removing Base step. It is active mode when changeable base is selected.

f Cancel: Cancel Base Changing Wizard execution.

ATTNTION

If Base Changing Wizard execution is canceled, selected base is excluded from operation. Ensure to check Fault Mask and I/O Skip.

3 Follow the information of Removing Base step, click Next button.

Page 732: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.4. System Monitoring

734 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

Field Description

a Information: Information of Removing Base step.

b Back: Cancel Removing Base step, go to previous step.

c Next: Move to Installing Base step.

d Cancel: Cancel Base Changing Wizard.

ATTENTION

Error in Removing Base is occurred when base is not removed.

4 Follow the information of Installing New Base step, click Next button.

Page 733: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.4. System Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 735 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Description

a Information: Information of Installing New Base.

b Back: It is inactive mode after base is removed.

c Next: Move to Changing Base Finished step.

d Cancel: Cancel the Base Changing Wizard.

ATTENTION

Error in Installing New Base is occurred when base is not installed. If base is installed normally, error is occurred when module type is different within setting module in I/O parameter and real installed

Page 734: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.4. System Monitoring

736 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

base.

5 Click Finished, when Changing Base is finished.

Page 735: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.4. System Monitoring

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 737 11/09 Honeywell

Step Action

Field Description

a Information: Information of Changing Base Finished.

b Back: It is inactive mode after base is removed.

c Finish: Finish Base Changing Wizard.

Page 736: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.4. System Monitoring

738 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Step Action

ATTENTION

Follow the below steps when base changing without Base Changing Wizard.

1. Set I/O Skip setting to change on base.

2. Set Fault Mask on base.

3. Remove the base from PLC.

4. Install the base to change.

5. Release I/O Skip setting on corresponding base.

6. Select Online > PLC Errors/Warnings, Check the error in base.

7. Select Online > I/O Information, Check the module is installed normally.

8. If there is no error, release the Fault Mask on corresponding base.

REFERENCE - INTERNAL

Refer to 2MLR CPU User’s Manual for more explanation.

Page 737: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 739 11/09 Honeywell

21. Warranty

21.1 Terms of warranty LSIS provides an 18-month warranty starting from the date of production.

21.2 Range of warranty For problems within the terms of the warranty, LSIS replaces the entire PLC or repair the defective parts free of charge except for the following cases.

1. Problems caused by improper conditions, environment or treatment.

2. Problems caused by external devices.

3. Problems caused by the user remodeling or repairing the PLC.

4. Problems caused by improper use of the product.

5. Problems caused by circumstances where the expectations exceed that of the science and technology level when LSIS produced the product.

6. Problems caused by natural disaster.

7. Warranty is limited to the PLC itself only. It is not valid for the whole system which the PLC is attached to.

Page 738: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

21. Warranty 21.2. Range of warranty

740 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell 11/09

Page 739: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7
Page 740: UG_SoftMaster_200_V1.7

Honeywell International Process Solutions 2500 West Union Hills Phoenix, AZ 85027